Imidazole compounds that modulate HSP90 activity

ABSTRACT

Compounds of formula (I), pharmaceutical compositions comprising compounds of formula (I) and methods of inhibiting Hsp90 in a cell, treating or preventing a proliferation disorder in a mammal and treating cancer in a mammal comprising administering a compound of formula (I) to a patient or a cell 
                         
Variable R 5  is an optionally substituted heteroaryl; an optionally substituted 6 to 14-membered aryl; a bicyclic 9-member heterocycle optionally substituted at any substitutable nitrogen or carbon atoms; or a substituent R 18 , defined herein. Ring A is an aryl or a heteroaryl optionally further substituted with one or more substituents in addition to R 3 . Substituent R 3  is defined herein.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/709,228, filed Aug. 18, 2005, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Although tremendous advances have been made in elucidating the genomic abnormalities that cause malignant cancer cells, currently available chemotherapy remains unsatisfactory, and the prognosis for the majority of patients diagnosed with cancer remains dismal. Most chemotherapeutic agents act on a specific molecular target thought to be involved in the development of the malignant phenotype. However, a complex network of signaling pathways regulate cell proliferation, and the majority of malignant cancers are facilitated by multiple genetic abnormalities in these pathway. Therefore, it is unlikely that a therapeutic agent that acts on one molecular target will be fully effective in curing a patient who has cancer.

Heat shock proteins (HSPs) are a class of chaperone proteins that are up-regulated in response to elevated temperature and other environmental stresses, such as ultraviolet light, nutrient deprivation, and oxygen deprivation. HSPs act as chaperones to other cellular proteins (called client proteins) and facilitate their proper folding and repair, and aid in the refolding of misfolded client proteins. There are several known families of HSPs, each having its own set of client proteins. The Hsp90 family is one of the most abundant HSP families, accounting for about 1-2% of proteins in a cell that is not under stress and increasing to about 4-6% in a cell under stress. Inhibition of Hsp90 results in degradation of its client proteins via the ubiquitin proteasome pathway. Unlike other chaperone proteins, the client proteins of Hsp90 are mostly protein kinases or transcription factors involved in signal transduction, and a number of its client proteins have been shown to be involved in the progression of cancer. Examples of Hsp90 client proteins that have been implicated in the progression of cancer are described below.

Her-2 is a transmembrane tyrosine kinase cell surface growth factor receptor that is expressed in normal epithelial cells. Her2 has an extracellular domain that interacts with extracellular growth factors and an internal tyrosine kinase portion that transmits the external growth signal to the nucleus of the cell. Her2 is overexpressed in a significant proportion of malignancies, such as breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, and gastric cancers, and is typically associated with a poor prognosis.

Akt kinase is a serine/threonine kinase which is a downstream effector molecule of phosphoinositide 3-kinase and is involved in protecting the cell from apoptosis. Akt kinase is thought to be involved in the progression of cancer because it stimulates cell proliferation and suppresses apoptosis.

Cdk4/cyclin D complexes are involved in phosphorylation of retinoblastoma protein which is an essential step in progression of a cell through the G1 phase of the cell cycle. Disruption of Hsp90 activity has been shown to decrease the half life of newly synthesized Cdk4.

Raf-1 is a MAP 3-kinase (MAP3K) which when activated can phosphorylate and activate the serine/threonine specific protein kinases ERK1 and ERK2. Activated ERKs play an important role in the control of gene expression involved in the cell division cycle, apoptosis, cell differentiation and cell migration.

The transforming protein of Rous sarcoma virus, v-src, is a prototype of an oncogene family that induces cellular transformation (i.e., tumorogenesis) by non-regulated kinase activity. Hsp90 has been shown to complex with v-scr and inhibit its degradation.

Hsp90 is required to maintain steroid hormone receptors in a conformation capable of binding hormone with high affinity. Inhibition of the action of Hsp90 therefore is expected to be useful in treating hormone-associated malignancies such as breast cancer.

p53 is a tumor suppressor protein that causes cell cycle arrest and apoptosis. Mutation of the p53 gene is found in about half of all human cancers making it one of the most common genetic alterations found in cancerous cells. In addition, p53 mutation is associated with a poor prognosis. Wild-type p53 has been shown to interact with Hsp90, but mutated p53 forms a more stable association than wild-type p53 as a result of its misfolded conformations. A stronger interaction with Hsp90 protects the mutated protein form normal proteolytic degradation and prolongs its half-life. In a cell that is heterozygous for mutated and wild-type p53, inhibition of the stabilizing effect of Hsp90 causes mutant p53 to be degraded and restores the normal transcriptional activity of wild-type p53.

Hif-1α is a hypoxia-inducible transcription factor that is up-regulated under low oxygen conditions. Under normal oxygen conditions Hif-1α associates with Von Hippel-Lindau (VHL) tumor suppressor protein and is degraded. Low oxygen conditions inhibit this association and allows Hif-1α to accumulate and complex with Hif-1β to form an active transcription complex that associates with hypoxia-response elements to activate the transcription of vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF). Increased Hif-1α is associated with increased metastasis and a poor prognosis.

There are two classes of PKs: protein tyrosine kinases (PTKs), which catalyze the phosphorylation of tyrosine kinase residues, and the serine-threonine kinases (STKs), which catalyze the phosphorylation of serine or threonine residues. Growth factor receptors with PTK activity are known as receptor tyrosine kinases. Receptor tyrosine kinases are a family of tightly regulated enzymes, and the aberrant activation of various members of the family is one of the hallmarks of cancer. The receptor tyrosine kinase family can be divided into subgroups that have similar structural organization and sequence similarity within the kinase domain.

Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (EGFR) is a member of the type 1 subgroup of receptor tyrosine kinase family of growth factor receptors, which play critical roles in cellular growth, differentiation, and survival. Activation of these receptors typically occurs via specific ligand binding which results in hetero- or homodimerization between receptor family members, with subsequent autophosphorylation of the tyrosine kinase domain. Specific ligands which bind to EGFR include epidermal growth factor (EGF), transforming growth factor α (TGFα), amphiregulin and some viral growth factors. Activation of EGFR triggers a cascade of intracellular signaling pathways involved in both cellular proliferation (the ras/raf/MAP kinase pathway) and survival (the PI3 kinase/Akt pathway). Members of this family, including EGFR and HER2, have been directly implicated in cellular transformation.

A number of human malignancies are associated with aberrant or overexpression of EGFR and/or overexpression of its specific ligands (Gullick, Br. Med. Bull. (1991), 47:87-98; Modijtahedi and Dean, Int. J. Oncol. (1994), 4:277-96; Salomon, et al., Crit. Rev. Oncol. Hematol. (1995); 19:183-232, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Aberrant or overexpression of EGFR has been associated with an adverse prognosis in a number of human cancers, including head and neck, breast, colon, prostate, lung (e.g., NSCLC, adenocarcinoma and squamous lung cancer), ovaries, gastrointestinal cancers (gastric, colon, pancreatic), renal cell cancer, bladder cancer, glioma, gynecological carcinomas, and prostate cancer. In some instances, overexpression of tumor EGFR has been correlated with both chemoresistance and a poor prognosis (Lei, et al., Anticancer Res. (1999), 19:221-8; Veale, et al., Br. J. Cancer (1993); 68:162-5, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference).

Gefitinib, a chemotherapeutic agent that inhibits the activity of EGFR, has been found to be highly efficacious in a subset of lung cancer patients that have mutations in the tyrosine kinase domain of EGFR. In the presence of EGF, these mutants displayed two to three times higher activity than wild type EGFR. In addition, wild type EGFR was internalized by the cells and down-regulated after 15 minutes, where as mutant EGFR was internalized more slowly and continued to be activated for up to three hours (Lynch, et al., The New England Journal of Medicine (2006), 350:2129-2139, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).

Gliomas are another type of cancer that is characterized by amplification and/or mutation of the EGFR gene. One of the most common mutations in the EGFR gene is a deletion of exons 2-7 which results in a truncated form of EGFR in which amino acids 6-273 of the extracellular domain are replaced with a single glycine residue. This mutation is called EGFRvIII and is expressed in about half of all glioblastomas. EGFRvIII is unable to bind EGF and TGFα and has constitutive, ligand-independent tyrosine kinase activity. Hsp90 co-purifies with EGFRvIII indicating that Hsp90 complexes with EGFRvIII. Moreover, Hsp90 inhibitor geldanamycin, a benzoquinone ansamycin antibiotic, was able to decrease the expression of EGFRvIII indicating that interaction with Hsp90 is essential to maintain high expression levels of EGFRvIII (Lavictoire, et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry (2003), 278(7):5292-5299, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). These results demonstrate that inhibiting the activity of Hsp90 is an effective strategy for treating cancers that are associated with inappropriate EGFR activity.

The members of the type III group of receptor tyrosine kinases include platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) receptors (PDGF receptors alpha and beta), colony-stimulating factor (CSF-1) receptor (CSF-1R, c-Fms), Fms-like tyrosine kinase (FLT3), and stem cell factor receptor (c-kit). FILT3 is primarily expressed on immature hematopoietic progenitors and regulates their proliferation and survival.

Hematologic cancers, also known as hematologic or hematopoietic malignancies, are cancers of the blood or bone marrow; including leukemia and lymphoma. Acute myelogenous leukemia (AML) is a clonal hematopoietic stem cell leukemia that represents about 90% of all acute leukemias in adults with an incidence of 3.9 per 100,000 (See e.g., Lowenberg et al., N. Eng. J. Med. 341: 1051-62 (1999) and Lopesde Menezes, et al, Clin. Cancer Res. (2005), 11(14):5281-5291, the enter teachings of both references are incorporated by reference). While chemotherapy can result in complete remissions, the long term disease-free survival rate for AML is about 14% with about 7,400 deaths from AML each year in the United States. Approximately 70% of AML blasts express wild type FLT3 and about 25% to about 35% express FLT3 kinase receptor mutations which result in constitutively active FLT3. Two types of activating mutations have been identified in AML patients: internal tandem duplications (ITDs) and point mutation in the activating loop of the kinase domain. FLT3-ITD mutations in AML patients is indicative of a poor prognosis for survival, and in patients who are in remission, FLT3-ITD mutations are the most significant factor adversely affecting relapse rate with 64% of patients having the mutation relapsing within 5 years (see Current Pharmaceutical Design (2005), 11:3449-3457, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). The prognostic significance of FLT3 mutations in clinical studies suggests that FLT3 plays a driving role in AML and may be necessary for the development and maintenance of the disease.

Mixed Lineage Leukemia (MLL) involve translocations of chromosome 11 band q23 (11q23) and occur in approximately 80% of infant hematological malignancies and 10% of adult acute leukemias. Although certain 11q23 translocation have been shown to be essential to immortalization of hematopoietic progenitors in vitro, a secondary genotoxic event is required to develop leukemia. There is a strong concordance between FLT3 and MLL fusion gene expression, and the most consistently overexpressed gene in MLL is FLT3. Moreover, it has been shown that activated FLT3 together with MLL fusion gene expression induces acute leukemia with a short latency period (see Ono, et al., J. of Clinical Investigation (2005), 115:919-929, the entire teachings of which are incorporated by reference). Therefore, it is believed that FLT3 signally is involved in the development and maintenance of MLL (see Armstrong, et al., Cancer Cell (2003), 3:173-183, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).

The FLT3-ITD mutation is also present in about 3% of cases of adult myelodysplastic syndrome and some cases of acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) (Current Pharmaceutical Design (2005), 11:3449-3457).

FLT3 has been shown to be a client protein of Hsp90, and 17AAG, a benzoquinone ansamycin antibiotic that inhibits Hsp90 activity, has been shown to disrupts the association of Flt3 with Hsp90. The growth of leukemia cell that express either wild type FLT3 or FLT3-ITD mutations was found to be inhibited by treatment with 17″AAG (Yao, et al., Clinical Cancer Research (2003), 9:4483-4493, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).

c-Kit is a membrane type III receptor protein tyrosine kinase which binds Stem Cell Factor (SCF) to its extraellular domain. c-Kit has tyrosine kinase activity and is required for normal hematopoiesis. However, mutations in c-kit can result in ligand-independent tyrosine kinase activity, autophosphorylation, and uncontrolled cell proliferation. Aberrant expression and/or activation of c-Kit has been implicated in a variety of pathologic states. For example, evidence for a contribution of c-Kit to neoplastic pathology includes its association with leukemias and mast cell tumors, small cell lung cancer, testicular cancer, and some cancers of the gastrointestinal tract and central nervous system. In addition, c-Kit has been implicated in playing a role in carcinogenesis of the female genital tract sarcomas of neuroectodermal origin, and Schwann cell neoplasia associated with neurofibromatosis. (Yang et al., J Clin Invest. (2003), 112:1851-1861; Viskochil, J Clin Invest. (2003), 112:1791-1793, the entire teachings of each of these reference are incorporated herein by reference). c-Kit has been shown to be a client protein of Hsp90, and Hsp90 inhibitor 17AAG, a benzoquinon ansamycin, has been shown to induce apoptosis in Kasumi-1 cells, an acute myeloid leukemia cell line that harbors a mutation in c-kit.

c-Met is a receptor tyrosine kinase that is encoded by the Met protooncogene and transduces the biological effects of hepatocyte growth factor (HGF), which is also referred to as scatter factor (SF). Jiang et al., Crit. Rev. Oncol. Hemtol. 29: 209-248 (1999), the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference. c-Met and HGF are expressed in numerous tissues, although their expression is normally confined predominantly to cells of epithelial and mesenchymal origin, respectively. c-Met and HGF are required for normal mammalian development and have been shown to be important in cell migration, cell proliferation and survival, morphogenic differentiation, and organization of 3-dimensional tubular structures (e.g., renal tubular cells, gland formation, etc.). The c-Met receptor has been shown to be expressed in a number of human cancers. c-Met and its ligand, HGF, have also been shown to be co-expressed at elevated levels in a variety of human cancers (particularly sarcomas). However, because the receptor and ligand are usually expressed by different cell types, c-Met signaling is most commonly regulated by tumor-stroma (tumor-host) interactions. Furthermore, c-Met gene amplification, mutation, and rearrangement have been observed in a subset of human cancers. Families with germine mutations that activate c-Met kinase are prone to multiple kidney tumors as well as tumors in other tissues. Numerous studies have correlated the expression of c-Met and/or HGF/SF with the state of disease progression of different types of cancer (including lung, colon, breast, prostate, liver, pancreas, brain, kidney, ovarian, stomach, skin, and bone cancers). Furthermore, the overexpression of c-Met or HGF have been shown to correlate with poor prognosis and disease outcome in a number of major human cancers including lung, liver, gastric, and breast.

BCR-ABL is an ocoprotein with tyrosine kinase activity and has been associated with chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), with a subset of patients with acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) and with a subset of patients with acute myelogenous leukemia (AML). In fact, the BCR-ABL oncogene has been found in at least 90-95% of patients with CML, 20% of adults with ALL, 5% of children with ALL, and in about 2% of adults with AML. The BCR-ABL oncoprotein is generated by the transloction of gene sequences from the c-ABL protein tyrosine kinase on chromosome 9 into the BCR sequences on chromosome 22, producing the Philadelphia chromosome. The BCR-ABL gene has been shown to produce at least three alternative chimeric proteins, p230 Bcr-Abl, p210 Bcr-Abl, and p190 Bcr-Abl which have unregulated tyrosine kinase activity. The p210 Bcr-Abl fusion protein is most often associated with CML, while the p190 Bcr-Abl fusion protein is most often associated with ALL. Bcr-Abl has also been associated with a variety of additional hematological malignancies including granulocytic hyperplasia, myelomonocytic leukemia, lymphomas and erythroid leukemia.

Studies have shown that lowering the expression or activity of Bcr-Abl is effective in treating Bcr-Abl-positive leukemias. For example, agents such as As₂O₃ which lower Bcr-Abl expression have been shown to be highly effective against Bcr-Abl leukemias. In addition, inhibition of Bcr-Abl tyrosine kinase activity by Imatinib (also known as STI571 and Gleevic) induces differentiation and apoptosis and causes eradication of Bcr-Abl positive leukemia cells both in vivo and in vitro. In patients with CML in the chronic phase, as well as in a blast crisis, treatment with Imatinib typically will induce remission. However, in many cases, particularly in those patients who were in a blast crisis before remission, the remission is not durable because the Bcr-Abl fusion protein develops mutations that cause it to be resistence to Imatinib. (See Nimmanapalli, et al., Cancer Research (2001), 61:1799-1804; and Gorre, et al., Blood (2002), 100:3041-3044, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference).

Bcr-Abl fusion proteins exist as complexes with Hsp90 and are rapidly degraded when the action of Hsp90 is inhibited. It has been shown that geldanamycin, a benzoquinone ansamycin antibiotic that disrupts the association of Bcr-Abl with Hsp90, results in proteasomal degradation of Bcr-Abl and induces apoptosis in Bcr-Abl leukemia cells.

Hsp90 has been shown by mutational analysis to be necessary for the survival of normal eukaryotic cells. However, Hsp90 is over expressed in many tumor types indicating that it may play a significant role in the survival of cancer cells and that cancer cells may be more sensitive to inhibition of Hsp90 than normal cells. For example, cancer cells typically have a large number of mutated and overexpressed oncoproteins that are dependent on Hsp90 for folding. In addition, because the environment of a tumor is typically hostile due to hypoxia, nutrient deprivation, acidosis, etc., tumor cells may be especially dependent on Hsp90 for survival. Moreover, inhibition of Hsp90 causes simultaneous inhibition of a number of oncoproteins, as well as hormone receptors and transcription factors making it an attractive target for an anti-cancer agent. In fact, benzoquinone ansamycins, a family of natural products that inhibit Hsp90, has shown evidence of therapeutic activity in clinical trials.

Although promising, benzoquinone ansamycins, and their derivatives, suffer from a number of limitations. For example, they have low oral bioavailability, and their limited solubility makes them difficult to formula. In addition, they are metabolized by polymorphic cytochrome P450 CYP3A4 and are a substrate for P-glycoprotein export pump involved in the development of multidrug resistance. Therefore, a need exist for new therapeutics that improve the prognosis of cancer patients and that reduces or overcomes the limitations of currently used anti-cancer agents.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is novel compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and methods of treatment of proliferative disorders, such as cancer, comprising administering the compounds of the present invention. The compounds of the present invention inhibit the activity of Hsp90. It has been shown that the compounds of the present invention inhibit Hsp90 protein (Example 1) and thereby lead to degradation of Hsp90 client proteins such as Her2 gene product (Example 2).

In one embodiment, the present invention is an Hsp90 inhibitor represented by structural formula (Ia):

or a tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or a prodrug thereof. In formula (Ia):

ring A is an aryl or a heteroaryl, wherein the aryl or the heteroaryl are optionally further substituted with one or more substituents in addition to R₃;

R₁ is —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

R₃ is —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NHR₈, —C(O)SH, —S(O)OH, —S(O)₂OH, —S(O)NHR₈, —S(O)₂NHR₈, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

R₅ is an optionally substituted heteroaryl or an optionally substituted 8 to 14-membered aryl;

R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl;

-   -   R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an         optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl,         an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted         cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an         optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted         aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally         substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl;         or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they         are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an         optionally substituted heteroaryl;

R₂₆ is a lower alkyl;

p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or 2; and

m, for each occurrence, is independently, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

In another embodiment of the present invention, the Hsp90 inhibitor is represented by structural formula (Ib):

In formula (Ib), R₂ is an optionally substituted phenyl group. Preferably, R₂ is substituted with one or more group represented by R₃₀, wherein R₃₀, for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. The remainder of the variables in structural formula (Ib) have values defined above with reference to structural formula (Ia).

In another embodiment of the present invention, the Hsp90 inhibitor is represented by structural formula (Ic):

In formula (Ic), R₁₈ is an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, or a substituted alkyl, wherein the alkyl group is substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁. The remainder of the variables in structural formula (Ic) have values defined above with reference to structural formula (Ia).

In yet another embodiment, the present invention is a method of inhibiting Hsp90 in a mammal in need of such treatment. The method comprises administering to the mammal an effective amount of an Hsp90 inhibitor disclosed herein.

Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of inhibiting Hsp90 in a cell. The method comprises administering to the cell an effective amount of an Hsp90 inhibitor disclosed herein.

Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of treating a proliferative disorder in a mammal comprising administering an effective amount of an Hsp90 inhibitor disclosed herein.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a method of treating cancer in a mammal. The method comprises administering to the mammal an effective amount of an Hsp90 inhibitor disclosed herein.

Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising an Hsp90 inhibitor disclosed herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The pharmaceutical compositions can be used in therapy, e.g., to inhibit Hsp90 activity in a mammal in need of such inhibition, to treat a mammal with a proliferative disorder, or to treat a mammal with cancer.

Yet another embodiment of the present invention is the use of an Hsp90 inhibitor disclosed herein for the manufacture of a medicament for inhibiting Hsp90 in a mammal in need of such inhibition or for treating a mammal with cancer.

The compounds shown in Tables 3-5 or compounds of the formulas disclosed herein, or tautomers, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, clathrates, hydrates, polymorphs or prodrugs thereof, inhibit the activity of Hsp90 and, thereby cause the degradation of Hsp90 client proteins. Hsp90 is necessary for the survival of normal eukaryotic cells. However, Hsp90 is over expressed in many tumor types indicating that it may play a significant role in the survival of cancer cells and that cancer cells may be more sensitive to inhibition of Hsp90 than normal cells. Thus, the compounds shown in Tables 3-5 or compounds of the formulas disclosed herein, or tautomers, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, clathrates, hydrates, polymorphs or prodrugs thereof, are useful treating proliferative disorders such as cancer.

Although chemotherapeutic agents initially cause tumor regression, most agents that are currently used to treat cancer target only one pathway to tumor progression. Therefore, in many instances, after treatment with one or more chemotherapeutic agents, a tumor develops multidrug resistance and no longer responses positively to treatment. One of the advantages of inhibiting Hsp90 activity is that several of its client proteins, which are mostly protein kinases or transcription factors involved in signal transduction, have been shown to be involved in the progression of cancer. Thus, inhibition of Hsp90 provides a method of short circuiting several pathways for tumor progression simultaneously. Therefore, treatment of tumors with an Hsp90 inhibitor of the invention either alone, or in combination with other chemotherapeutic agents, is more likely to result in regression or elimination of the tumor, and less likely to result in the development of more aggressive multidrug resistant tumors than other currently available therapies.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to the use of the compounds of the invention to inhibit Hsp90 activity and for the treatment of a proliferative disorder, such as cancer. In particular, the present invention encompasses the use of compounds of the invention to slow or stop the growth of cancerous cells or to reduce or eliminate cancerous cells in a mammal.

In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention can be used in combination with other chemotherapeutic agents and may help to prevent or reduce the development of multidrug resistant cancerous cells in a mammal. In this embodiment, the compounds of the invention may allow a reduced efficacious amount of a second chemotherapeutic agent given to a mammal, because compounds of the invention should inhibit the development of multidrug resistant cancerous cells.

I. Definition of Terms

Unless otherwise specified, the below terms used herein are defined as follows:

As used herein, the term “alkyl” means a saturated straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Representative saturated straight chain alkyls include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-nonyl and n-decyl; while saturated branched alkyls include isopropyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 3-methylbutyl, 2-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 4-methylpentyl, 2-methylhexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 4-methylhexyl, 5-methylhexyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylpentyl, 2,4-dimethylpentyl, 2,3-dimethylhexyl, 2,4-dimethylhexyl, 2,5-dimethylhexyl, 2,2-dimethylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylhexyl, 3,3-dimethylpentyl, 3,3-dimethylhexyl, 4,4-dimethylhexyl, 2-ethylpentyl, 3-ethylpentyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 3-ethylhexyl, 4-ethylhexyl, 2-methyl-2-ethylpentyl, 2-methyl-3-ethylpentyl, 2-methyl-4-ethylpentyl, 2-methyl-2-ethylhexyl, 2-methyl-3-ethylhexyl, 2-methyl-4-ethylhexyl, 2,2-diethylpentyl, 3,3-diethylhexyl, 2,2-diethylhexyl, 3,3-diethylhexyl and the like. The terms “C1-C6 alkyl” and “C1-C3 alkyls” mean saturated straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbons having from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, respectively. Representative C1-C6 and C1-C3 alkyl groups are those shown above having from 1 to 6 or 1 to 3 carbon atoms, respectively. Alkyl groups included in compounds of this invention may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “heteroalkyl” refers to an alkyl as defined above, in which one or more internal carbon atoms have been substituted with a heteroatom. Each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, which can be oxidized (e.g., N(O)), secondary, tertiary or quaternized; oxygen; and sulfur, including sulfoxide and sulfone.

As used herein, the term “alkenyl” means a saturated straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Representative straight chain and branched C2-C10 alkenyls include vinyl, allyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, isobutylenyl, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-methyl-1-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, 1-hexenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 1-heptenyl, 2-heptenyl, 3-heptenyl, 1-octenyl, 2-octenyl, 3-octenyl, 1-nonenyl, 2-nonenyl, 3-nonenyl, 1-decenyl, 2-decenyl, 3-decenyl and the like. Alkenyl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “alkynyl” means a saturated straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and having at lease one carbon-carbon triple bond. Representative straight chain and branched alkynyls include acetylenyl, propynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 1-pentynyl, 2-pentynyl, 3-methyl-1-butynyl, 4-pentynyl, 1-hexynyl, 2-hexynyl, 5-hexynyl, 1-heptynyl, 2-heptynyl, 6-heptynyl, 1-octynyl, 2-octynyl, 7-octynyl, 1-nonynyl, 2-nonynyl, 8-nonynyl, 1-decynyl, 2-decynyl, 9-decynyl, and the like. Alkynyl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkyl” means a saturated, mono- or polycyclic alkyl radical having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms. Representative cycloalkyls include cyclopropyl, 1-methylcyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, -cyclodecyl, octahydro-pentalenyl, and the like. Cycloalkyl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkenyl” means a mono- or poly-cyclic non-aromatic alkyl radical having at least one carbon-carbon double bond in the cyclic system and from 3 to 20 carbon atoms. Representative cycloalkenyls include cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptenyl, cycloheptadienyl, cycloheptatrienyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclooctadienyl, cyclooctatrienyl, cyclooctatetraenyl, cyclononenyl, cyclononadienyl, cyclodecenyl, cyclodecadienyl, 1,2,3,4,5,8-hexahydronaphthalenyl and the like. Cycloalkenyl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “haloalkyl” means and alkyl group in which one or more (including all) the hydrogen radicals are replaced by a halo group, wherein each halo group is independently selected from —F, —Cl, —Br, and —I. The term “halomethyl” means a methyl in which one to three hydrogen radical(s) have been replaced by a halo group. Representative haloalkyl groups include trifluoromethyl, bromomethyl, 1,2-dichloroethyl, 4-iodobutyl, 2-fluoropentyl, and the like.

As used herein, an “alkoxy” is an alkyl group which is attached to another moiety via an oxygen linker.

As used herein, an “haloalkoxy” is an haloalkyl group which is attached to another moiety via an oxygen linker.

As used herein, the term an “aromatic ring” or “aryl” means a hydrocarbon monocyclic or polycyclic radical in which at least one ring is aromatic. Examples of suitable aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, tolyl, anthracenyl, fluorenyl, indenyl, azulenyl, and naphthyl, as well as benzo-fused carbocyclic moieties such as 5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthyl. Aryl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents. In one embodiment, the aryl group is a monocyclic ring, wherein the ring comprises 6 carbon atoms, referred to herein as “(C6)aryl.”

As used herein, the term “aralkyl” means an aryl group that is attached to another group by a (C1-C6)alkylene group. Representative aralkyl groups include benzyl, 2-phenyl-ethyl, naphth-3-yl-methyl and the like. Aralkyl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “alkylene” refers to an alkyl group that has two points of attachment. The term “C1-C6 alkylene” refers to an alkylene group that has from one to six carbon atoms. Straight chain C1-C6 alkylene groups are preferred. Non-limiting examples of alkylene groups include methylene (—CH₂—), ethylene (—CH₂CH₂—), n-propylene (—CH₂CH₂CH₂—), isopropylene (—CH₂CH(CH₃)—), and the like. Alkylene groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “heterocyclyl” means a monocyclic (typically having 3 to 10-members) or a polycyclic (typically having 7- to 20-members) heterocyclic ring system which is either a saturated ring or a unsaturated non-aromatic ring. A 3- to 10-membered heterocycle can contain up to 5 heteroatoms; and a 7- to 20-membered heterocycle can contain up to 7 heteroatoms. Typically, a heterocycle has at least on carbon atom ring member. Each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, which can be oxidized (e.g., N(O)) or quaternized; oxygen; and sulfur, including sulfoxide and sulfone. The heterocycle may be attached via any heteroatom or carbon atom. Representative heterocycles include morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, pyrrolidinonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, hydantoinyl, valerolactamyl, oxiranyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydropyrindinyl, tetrahydropyrimidinyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, and the like. A heteroatom may be substituted with a protecting group known to those of ordinary skill in the art, for example, the hydrogen on a nitrogen may be substituted with a tert-butoxycarbonyl group. Furthermore, the heterocyclyl may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents. Only stable isomers of such substituted heterocyclic groups are contemplated in this definition.

As used herein, the term “heteroaromatic”, “heteroaryl” or like terms means a monocyclic or polycyclic heteroaromatic ring comprising carbon atom ring members and one or more heteroatom ring members. Each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, which can be oxidized (e.g., N(O)) or quaternized; oxygen; and sulfur, including sulfoxide and sulfone. Representative heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, 1-oxo-pyridyl, furanyl, benzo[1,3]dioxolyl, benzo[1,4]dioxinyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, a isoxazolyl, quinolinyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, a triazinyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isoquinolinyl, indazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzofuryl, indolizinyl, imidazopyridyl, tetrazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, indolyl, tetrahydroindolyl, azaindolyl, imidazopyridyl, quinazolinyl, purinyl, pyrrolo[2,3]pyrimidinyl, pyrazolo[3,4]pyrimidinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridyl, and benzothienyl. In one embodiment, the heteroaromatic ring is selected from 5-8 membered monocyclic heteroaryl rings. The point of attachment of a heteroaromatic or heteroaryl ring to another group may be at either a carbon atom or a heteroatom of the heteroaromatic or heteroaryl rings. Heteroaryl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “C5 heteroaryl” means an aromatic heterocyclic ring of 5 members, wherein at least one carbon atom of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, for example, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen. Representative C5 heteroaryls include furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazinyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C6 heteroaryl” means an aromatic heterocyclic ring of 6 members, wherein at least one carbon atom of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, for example, oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur. Representative C6 heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl and the like.

As used herein, the term “heteroaralkyl” means a heteroaryl group that is attached to another group by a C1-C6 alkylene. Representative heteroaralkyls include 2-(pyridin-4-yl)-propyl, 2-(thien-3-yl)-ethyl, imidazol-4-yl-methyl and the like. Heteroaralkyl groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.

As used herein, the term “halogen” or “halo” means —F, —Cl, —Br or —I.

Suitable substituents for an alkyl, alkylene, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl groups include any substituent which will form a stable compound of the invention and not significantly lower the Hsp90 inhibitory activity of the compound. Examples of substituents for an alkyl, alkylene, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroarylalkyl include an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, a haloalkyl, —C(O)NR₄₀R₄₁, —C(S)NR₄₀R₄₁, —C(NR₃₂)NR₄₀R₄₁, —NR₄₂C(O)R₄₃, —NR₄₂C(S)R₄₃, —NR₄₂C(NR₃₂)R₄₃, halo, —OR₄₂, cyano, nitro, haloalkoxy, —C(O)R₄₂, —C(S)R₄₂, —C(NR₃₂)R₄₂, —NR₄₀R₄₁, —C(O)OR₄₂, —C(S)OR₄₂, —C(NR₃₂)OR₄₂, —OC(O)R₄₂, —OC(S)R₄₂, —OC(NR₃₂)R₄₂, —NR₄₂C(O)NR₄₀R₄₁, —NR₄₂C(S)NR₄₀R₄₁, —NR₄₂C(NR₃₂)NR₄₀R₄₁, —OC(O)NR₄₀R₄₁, —OC(S)NR₄₀R₄₁, —OC(NR₃₂)NR₄₀R₄₁, —NR₄₂C(O)OR₄₃, —NR₄₂C(S)OR₄₃, —NR₄₂C(NR₃₂)OR₄₃, —S(O)_(h)R₄₂, —OS(O)_(p)R₄₂, —NR₄₂S(O)_(p)R₄₂, —S(O)_(p)NR₄₀R₄₁, —OS(O)_(p)NR₄₀R₄₁, or —NR₄₂S(O)_(p)NR₄₀R₄₁, wherein

R₄₀ and R₄₁, for each occurrence are, independently, H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₄₀ and R₄₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached is optionally substituted heterocyclyl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;

R₄₂ and R₄₃ for each occurrence are, independently, H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; and

R₃₂, for each occurrence is, independently, H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, —C(O)R₄₂, —C(O)NR₄₀R₄₁, —S(O)_(p)R₄₂, or —S(O)_(p)NR₄₀R₄₁;

p and h, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or 2.

Preferably, R₄₀, R₄₁, R₄₂, R₄₃ and R₃₂, for each occurrence, are independently, H, an alkyl or phenyl group.

In addition, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkylene, a heterocyclyl, and any saturated portion of a alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, aralkyl, and heteroaralkyl groups, may also be substituted with ═O, ═S, ═N—R₃₂.

When a heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl group contains a nitrogen atom, it may be substituted or unsubstituted. When a nitrogen atom in the aromatic ring of a heteroaryl group has a substituent the nitrogen may be a quaternary nitrogen.

As used herein, the term “lower” refers to a group having up to four atoms. For example, a “lower alkyl” refers to an alkyl radical having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, “lower alkoxy” refers to “—O—(C1-C4)alkyl and a “lower alkenyl” or “lower alkynyl” refers to an alkenyl or alkynyl radical having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.

Unless indicated otherwise, the compounds of the invention containing reactive functional groups (such as (without limitation) carboxy, hydroxy, thiol, and amino moieties) also include protected derivatives thereof. “Protected derivatives” are those compounds in which a reactive site or sites are blocked with one ore more protecting groups. Examples of suitable protecting groups for hydroxyl groups include benzyl, methoxymethyl, allyl, trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, acetate, and the like. Examples of suitable amine protecting groups include benzyloxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, tert-butyl, benzyl and fluorenylmethyloxy-carbonyl (Fmoc). Examples of suitable thiol protecting groups include benzyl, tert-butyl, acetyl, methoxymethyl and the like. Other suitable protecting groups are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art and include those found in T. W. Greene, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1981.

As used herein, the term “compound(s) of this invention” and similar terms refers to a compound of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, polymorph or prodrug thereof, and also include protected derivatives thereof.

The compounds of the invention may contain one or more chiral centers and/or double bonds and, therefore, exist as stereoisomers, such as double-bond isomers (i.e., geometric isomers), enantiomers, or diastereomers. According to this invention, the chemical structures depicted herein, including the compounds of this invention, encompass all of the corresponding compounds' enantiomers, diastereomers and geometric isomers, that is, both the stereochemically pure form (e.g., geometrically pure, enantiomerically pure, or diastereomerically pure) and isomeric mixtures (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomeric mixtures). In some cases, one enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer will possess superior activity or an improved toxicity or kinetic profile compared to other isomers. In those cases, such enantiomers, diastereomers and geometric isomers of compounds of this invention are preferred.

As used herein, the term “polymorph” means solid crystalline forms of a compound of the present invention or complex thereof. Different polymorphs of the same compound can exhibit different physical, chemical and/or spectroscopic properties. Different physical properties include, but are not limited to stability (e.g., to heat or light), compressibility and density (important in formulation and product manufacturing), and dissolution rates (which can affect bioavailability). Differences in stability can result from changes in chemical reactivity (e.g., differential oxidation, such that a dosage form discolors more rapidly when comprised of one polymorph than when comprised of another polymorph) or mechanical characteristics (e.g., tablets crumble on storage as a kinetically favored polymorph converts to thermodynamically more stable polymorph) or both (e.g., tablets of one polymorph are more susceptible to breakdown at high humidity). Different physical properties of polymorphs can affect their processing. For example, one polymorph might be more likely to form solvates or might be more difficult to filter or wash free of impurities than another due to, for example, the shape or size distribution of particles of it.

As used herein, the term “hydrate” means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.

As used herein, the term “clathrate” means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof in the form of a crystal lattice that contains spaces (e.g., channels) that have a guest molecule (e.g., a solvent or water) trapped within.

As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term “prodrug” means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide a compound of this invention. Prodrugs may become active upon such reaction under biological conditions, or they may have activity in their unreacted forms. Examples of prodrugs contemplated in this invention include, but are not limited to, analogs or derivatives of compounds of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5 that comprise biohydrolyzable moieties such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues. Other examples of prodrugs include derivatives of compounds of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5 that comprise —NO, —NO₂, —ONO, or —ONO₂ moieties. Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by 1 Burger's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery (1995) 172-178, 949-982 (Manfred E. Wolff ed., 5th ed).

As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the terms “biohydrolyzable amide”, “biohydrolyzable ester”, “biohydrolyzable carbamate”, “biohydrolyzable carbonate”, “biohydrolyzable ureide” and “biohydrolyzable phosphate analogue” mean an amide, ester, carbamate, carbonate, ureide, or phosphate analogue, respectively, that either: 1) does not destroy the biological activity of the compound and confers upon that compound advantageous properties in vivo, such as improved water solubility, improved circulating half-life in the blood (e.g., because of reduced metabolism of the prodrug), improved uptake, improved duration of action, or improved onset of action; or 2) is itself biologically inactive but is converted in vivo to a biologically active compound. Examples of biohydrolyzable amides include, but are not limited to, lower alkyl amides, α-amino acid amides, alkoxyacyl amides, and alkylaminoalkylcarbonyl amides. Examples of biohydrolyzable esters include, but are not limited to, lower alkyl esters, alkoxyacyloxy esters, alkyl acylamino alkyl esters, and choline esters. Examples of biohydrolyzable carbamates include, but are not limited to, lower alkylamines, substituted ethylenediamines, aminoacids, hydroxyalkylamines, heterocyclic and heteroaromatic amines, and polyether amines.

As used herein, “Hsp90” includes each member of the family of heat shock proteins having a mass of about 90-kiloDaltons. For example, in humans the highly conserved Hsp90 family includes cytosolic Hsp90α and Hsp90α isoforms, as well as GRP94, which is found in the endoplasmic reticulum, and HSP75/TRAP1, which is found in the mitochondrial matrix.

The term “c-kit” or “c-kit kinase” refers to a membrane receptor protein tyrosine kinase which is preferably activated upon binding Stem Cell Factor (SCF) to its extracellular domain (Yarden et al., 1987; Qiu et al., 1988). The full length amino acid sequence of a c-kit kinase preferably is as set forth in Yarden, et al., 1987, EMBO J., 11:3341-3351; and Qiu, et al., 1988, EMBO J., 7:1003-1011, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety, including any drawings. Mutant versions of c-kit kinase are encompassed by the term “c-kit” or “c-kit kinase” and include those that fall into two classes: (1) having a single amino acid substitution at codon 816 of the human c-kit kinase, or its equivalent position in other species (Ma et al., 1999, J. Invest Dermatol., 112:165-170), and (2) those which have mutations involving the putative juxtamembrane z-helix of the protein (Ma, et al., 1999, J. Biol. Chem., 274:13399-13402). Both of these publications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety, including any drawings.

As used herein, “Bcr-Abl” is a fusion protein that results from the translocation of gene sequences from c-ABL protein tyrosine kinase on chromosome 9 into BCR sequences on chromosome 22 producing the Philiadelphia chromosome. A schematic representation of human Bcr, Abl, and Bcr-Abl can be seen in FIG. 1 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/193,651, filed on Jul. 9, 2002, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference. Depending on the breaking point in the Bcr gene, Bcr-Abl fusion proteins can vary in size from 185-230 kDa but they must contain at least the OLI domain from Bcr and the TK domain from Abl for transforming activity. The most common Bcr-Abl gene products found in humans are P230 Bcr-Abl, P210 Bcr-Abl, and P190 Bcr-Abl. P210 Bcr-Abl is characteristic of CML and P190 Bcr-Abl is characteristic of ALL.

FLT3 kinase is a tyrosine kinase receptor involved in the regulation and stimulation of cellular proliferation (see Gilliland et al., Blood (2002), 100:1532-42, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). The FLT3 kinase has five immunoglobulin-like domains in its extracellular region as well as an insert region of 75-100 amino acids in the middle of its cytoplasmic domain. FLT3 kinase is activated upon the binding of the FLT3 ligand, which causes receptor dimerization. Dimerization of the FLT3 kinase by FLT3 ligand activates the intracellular kinase activity as well as a cascade of downstream substrates including Stat5, Ras, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (PI3K), PLCγ, Erk2, Akt, MAPK, SHC, SHP2, and SHIP (see Rosnet et al., Acta Haematol. (1996), 95:218; Hayakawa et al., Oncogene (2000), 19:624; Mizuki et al., Blood (2000), 96:3907; and Gilliand et al., Curr. Opin. Hematol. (2002), 9: 274-81, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Both membrane-bound and soluble FLT3 ligand bind, dimerize, and subsequently activate the FLT3 kinase.

Normal cells that express FLT3 kinase include immature hematopoietic cells, typically CD34+ cells, placenta, gonads, and brain (see Rosnet, et al., Blood (1993), 82:1110-19; Small et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. (1994), 91:459-63; and Rosnet et al., Leukemia (1996), 10:238-48, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). However, efficient stimulation of proliferation via FLT3 kinase typically requires other hematopoietic growth factors or interleukins. FLT3 kinase also plays a critical role in immune function through its regulation of dendritic cell proliferation and dilferentiation (see McKenna et al., Blood (2000), 95:3489-97, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).

Numerous hematologic malignancies express FLT3 kinase, the most prominent of which is AML (see Yokota et al., Leukemia (1997), 11:1605-09, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Other FLT3 expressing malignancies include B-precursor cell acute lymphoblastic leukemias, myelodysplastic leukemias, T-cell acute lymphoblastic leukemias, and chronic myelogenous leukemias (see Rasko et al., Leukemia (1995), 9:2058-66, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference).

FLT3 kinase mutations associated with hematologic malignancies are activating mutations. In other words, the FLT3 kinase is constitutively activated without the need for binding and dimerization by FLT3 ligand, and therefore stimulates the cell to grow continuously. Two types of activating mutations have been identified: internal tandem duplications (ITDs) and point mutation in the activating loop of the kinase domain. As used herein, the term “FLT3 kinase” refers to both wild type FLT3 kinase and mutant FLT3 kinases, such as FLT3 kinases that have activating mutations.

Compounds provided herein are useful in treating conditions characterized by inappropriate FLT3 activity such as proliferative disorders. Inappropriate FLT3 activity includes, but is not limited to, enhanced FLT3 activity resulting from increased or de novo expression of FLT3 in cells, increased FLT3 expression or activity, and FLT3 mutations resulting in constitutive activation. The existence of inappropriate or abnormal FLT3 ligand and FLT3 levels or activity can be determined using well known methods in the art. For example, abnormally high FLT3 levels can be determined using commercially available ELISA kits. FLT3 levels can be determined using flow cytometric analysis, immunohistochemical analysis, and in situ hybridization techniques.

By “epidermal growth factor receptor” or “EGFR” as used herein is meant, any epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR) protein, peptide, or polypeptide having EGFR or EGFR family (e.g., HER1, HER2, HER3, and/or HER4) activity (such as encoded by EGFR Genbank Accession Nos. shown in Table I of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/923,354, filed on Aug. 20, 2004, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), or any other EGFR transcript derived from a EGFR gene and/or generated by EGFR translocation. The term “EGFR” is also meant to include other EGFR protein, peptide, or polypeptide derived from EGFR isoforms (e.g., HER1, HER2, HER3, and/or HER4), mutant EGFR genes, splice variants of EGFR genes, and EGFR gene polymorphisms.

As used herein, the terms “subject”, “patient” and “mammal” are used interchangeably. The terms “subject” and “patient” refer to an animal (e.g., a bird such as a chicken, quail or turkey, or a mammal), preferably a mammal including a non-primate (e.g., a cow, pig, horse, sheep, rabbit, guinea pig, rat, cat, dog, and mouse) and a primate (e.g., a monkey, chimpanzee and a human), and more preferably a human. In one embodiment, the subject is a non-human animal such as a farm animal (e.g., a horse, cow, pig or sheep), or a pet (e.g., a dog, cat, guinea pig or rabbit). In a preferred embodiment, the subject is a human.

As used herein, a “proliferative disorder” or a “hyperproliferative disorder,” and other equivalent terms, means a disease or medical condition involving pathological growth of cells. Proliferative disorders include cancer, smooth muscle cell proliferation, systemic sclerosis, cirrhosis of the liver, adult respiratory distress syndrome, idiopathic cardiomyopathy, lupus erythematosus, retinopathy, e.g., diabetic retinopathy or other retinopathies, cardiac hyperplasia, reproductive system associated disorders such as benign prostatic hyperplasia and ovarian cysts, pulmonary fibrosis, endometriosis, fibromatosis, harmatomas, lymphangiomatosis, sarcoidosis, desmoid tumors.

Smooth muscle cell proliferation includes hyperproliferation of cells in the vasculature, for example, intimal smooth muscle cell hyperplasia, restenosis and vascular occlusion, particularly stenosis following biologically- or mechanically-mediated vascular injury, e.g., vascular injury associated with angioplasty. Moreover, intimal smooth muscle cell hyperplasia can include hyperplasia in smooth muscle other than the vasculature, e.g., bile duct blockage, bronchial airways of the lung in patients with asthma, in the kidneys of patients with renal interstitial fibrosis, and the like.

Non-cancerous proliferative disorders also include hyperproliferation of cells in the skin such as psoriasis and its varied clinical forms, Reiter's syndrome, pityriasis rubra pilaris, and hyperproliferative variants of disorders of keratinization (e.g., actinic keratosis, senile keratosis), scleroderma, and the like.

In a preferred embodiment, the proliferative disorder is cancer. Cancers that can be treated or prevented by the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to human sarcomas and carcinomas, e.g., fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma; leukemias, e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia and acute myelocytic leukemia (myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic and erythroleukemia); chronic leukemia (chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia); and polycythemia vera, lymphoma (Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma, Waldenstrobm's macroglobulinemia, and heavy chain disease.

Other examples of leukemias include acute and/or chronic leukemias, e.g., lymphocytic leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the p388 (murine) cell line), large granular lymphocytic leukemia, and lymphoblastic leukemia; T-cell leukemias, e.g., T-cell leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the CEM, Jurkat, and HSB-2 (acute), YAC-1 (murine) cell lines), T-lymphocytic leukemia, and T-lymphoblastic leukemia; B cell leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the SB (acute) cell line), and B-lymphocytic leukemia; mixed cell leukemias, e.g., B and T cell leukemia and B and T lymphocytic leukemia; myeloid leukemias, e.g., granulocytic leukemia, myelocytic leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the HL-60 (promyelocyte) cell line), and myelogenous leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the K562 (chronic) cell line); neutrophilic leukemia; eosinophilic leukemia; monocytic leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the THP-1 (acute) cell line); myelomonocytic leukemia; Naegeli-type myeloid leukemia; and nonlymphocytic leukemia. Other examples of leukemias are described in Chapter 60 of The Chemotherapy Sourcebook, Michael C. Perry Ed., Williams & Williams (1992) and Section 36 of Holland Frie Cancer Medicine 5th Ed., Bast et al. Eds., B.C. Decker Inc. (2000). The entire teachings of the preceding references are incorporated herein by reference.

In a more preferred embodiment, proliferative disorders are lung cancers. Even more preferably, the disorder is non-small cell lung carcinoma as exemplified, e.g. by the RERF, A549, NCI-H1993, and NCI-H460 cell lines.

In one embodiment, the disclosed method is believed to be particularly effective in treating subject with non-solid tumors such as multiple myeloma. In another embodiment, the disclosed method is believed to be particularly effective against T-leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by Jurkat and CEM cell lines); B-leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the SB cell line); promyelocytes (e.g., as exemplified by the HL-60 cell line); uterine sarcoma (e.g., as exemplified by the MES-SA cell line); monocytic leukemia (e.g., as exemplified by the THP-1 (acute) cell line); and lymphoma (e.g., as exemplified by the U937 cell line).

In one embodiment, the disclosed method is believed to be particularly effective in treating subject with non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL). Lymphomas are generally classified as either Hodgkin's disease (HD) or non-Hodgkin's lymphomas (NHL). NHL differs from HD by the absence of Reed-Sternberg cells. The course of NHL is less predictable than HD and is more likely to spread to areas beyond the lymph nodes. NHL can be further divided into B-cell NHL and T-cell NHL each of which can be further categorized into a variety of different subtypes. For example, B-cell NHL includes Burkitt's lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, nodal marginal zone B-cell lymphoma, plasma cell neoplasms, small lymphocytic lymphoma/chronic lymphocytic leukemia, mantle cell lymphoma, extranodal marginal zone B-cell lymphoma, and lymphoplamacytic lymphoma/Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia. T-cell NHL include anaplastic large-cell lymphoma, precursor-T-cell lymphoblastic leukemia/lymphoma, unspecified peripheral T-cell lymphoma, acute lymphoblastic leukemia/lymphoma, angioimmunoblastic T-cell lymphoma, and mycosis fungoides.

Without wishing to be bound by any theory, it is believed that the compounds of the invention are useful for treating NHLs, including B-cell and T-cell NHLs, since Hsp90 is upregulated in many NHLs. In particular, in a survey of 412 cases of NHL in B-cell NHL, Hsp90 was found to be moderately to strongly over expressed in all cases of Burkitt's lymphoma ( 5/5, 100%), and in a subset of follicular lymphoma ( 17/28, 61%), diffuse large B-cell lymphoma ( 27/46, 59%), nodal marginal zone B-cell lymphoma ( 6/16, 38%), plasma cell neoplasms ( 14/39, 36%), small lymphocytic lymphoma/chronic lymphocytic leukemia ( 3/9, 33%), mantle cell lymphoma ( 12/38, 32%), and lymnphoplamacytic lymphoma/Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia ( 3/10, 30%). In addition, in T-cell NHL, Hsp90 was found to be moderately to strongly over expressed in a subset of anaplastic large-cell lymphoma ( 14/24, 58%), precursor-T-cell lymphoblastic leukemia/lymphoma ( 20/65, 31%), unspecified peripheral T-cell lymphoma ( 8/43, 23%), and angioimmunoblastic T-cell lymphoma ( 2/17, 12%). (See Valbuena, et al., Modern Pathology (2005), 18:1343-1349, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference.)

Some of the disclosed methods can be particularly effective at treating subjects whose cancer has become “multi-drug resistant”. A cancer which initially responded to an anti-cancer drug becomes resistant to the anti-cancer drug when the anti-cancer drug is no longer effective in treating the subject with the cancer. For example, many tumors will initially respond to treatment with an anti-cancer drug by decreasing in size or even going into remission, only to develop resistance to the drug. Drug resistant tumors are characterized by a resumption of their growth and/or reappearance after having seemingly gone into remission, despite the administration of increased dosages of the anti-cancer drug. Cancers that have developed resistance to two or more anti-cancer drugs are said to be “multi-drug resistant”. For example, it is common for cancers to become resistant to three or more anti-cancer agents, often five or more anti-cancer agents and at times ten or more anti-cancer agents.

In one embodiment, compounds of the invention are vascular targeting agents. In one aspect, compounds of the invention are effective for blocking, occluding, or otherwise disrupting blood flow in “neovasculature.” In one aspect, the invention provides a novel treatment for diseases involving the growth of new blood vessels (“neovasculature”), including, but not limited to: cancer; infectious diseases; autoimmune disorders; benign tumors, e.g. hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas; artheroscleric plaques; ocular angiogenic diseases, e.g., diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, persistent hyperplastic vitreous syndrome, choroidal neovascularization, uvietis and Pterygia (abnormal blood vessel growth) of the eye; rheumatoid arthritis; psoriasis; warts; allergic dermatitis; blistering disease; Karposi sarcoma; delayed wound healing; endometriosis; uterine bleeding; ovarian cysts; ovarian hyperstimulation; vasculogenesis; granulations; hypertrophic scars (keloids); nonunion fractures; scleroderma; trachoma; vascular adhesions; vascular malformations; DiGeorge syndrome; HHT; transplant arteriopathy; restinosis; obesity; myocardial angiogenesis; coronary collaterals; cerebral collaterals; arteriovenous malformations; ischemic limb angiogenesis; primary pulmonary hypertension; pulmonary edema; asthma; nasal polyps; inflammatory bowel disease; periodontal disease; ascites; peritoneal adhesions; Osler-Webber Syndrome; plaque neovascularization; telangiectasia; hemophiliac joints; synovitis; osteomyelitis; osteophyte formation; angiofibroma; fibromuscular dysplasia; wound granulation; Crohn's disease; and atherosclerosis.

Vascular targeting can be demonstrated by any method known to those skilled in the art, such as the method described herein in Examples 3 and 4.

As used herein, the term “angiogenesis” refers to a fundamental process of generating new blood vessels in tissues or organs. Angiogenesis is involved with or associated with many diseases or conditions, including, but not limited to: cancer; ocular neovascular disease; age-related macular degeneration; diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity; corneal graft rejection; neovascular glaucoma; retrolental fibroplasias; epidemic keratoconjunctivitis; Vitamin A deficiency; contact lens overwear; atopic keratitis; superior limbic keratitis; pterygium keratitis sicca; sjogrens; acne rosacea; warts; eczema; phylectenulosis; syphilis; Mycobacteria infections; lipid degeneration; chemical burns; bacterial ulcers; fungal ulcers; Herpes simplex infections; Herpes zoster infections; protozoan infections; Kaposi's sarcoma; Mooren's ulcer; Terrien's marginal degeneration; mariginal keratolysis; rheumatoid arthritis; systemic lupus; polyarteritis; trauma; Wegener's sarcoidosis; scleritis; Stevens-Johnson disease; pemphigoid; radial keratotomy; corneal graph rejection; diabetic retinopathy; macular degeneration; sickle cell anemia; sarcoid; syphilis; pseudoxanthoma elasticum; Paget's disease; vein occlusion; artery occlusion; carotid obstructive disease; chronic uveitis/vitritis; mycobacterial infections; Lyme's disease; systemic lupus erythematosis; retinopathy of prematurity; Eales' disease; Behcet's disease; infections causing a retinitis or choroiditis; presumed ocular histoplasmosis; Best's disease; myopia; optic pits; Stargardt's disease; pars planitis; chronic retinal detachment; hyperviscosity syndromes; toxoplasmosis; trauma and post-laser complications; diseases associated with rubeosis (neovasculariation of the angle); diseases caused by the abnormal proliferation of fibrovascular or fibrous tissue including all forms of proliferative vitreoretinopathy; rheumatoid arthritis; osteoarthritis; ulcerative colitis; Crohn's disease; Bartonellosis; atherosclerosis; Osler-Weber-Rendu disease; hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia; pulmonary hemangiomatosis; pre-eclampsia; endometriosis; fibrosis of the liver and of the kidney; developmental abnormalities (organogenesis); skin disclolorations (e.g., hemangioma, nevus flammeus, or nevus simplex); wound healing; hypertrophic scars, i.e., keloids; wound granulation; vascular adhesions; cat scratch disease (Rochele ninalia quintosa); ulcers (Helicobacter pylori); keratoconjunctivitis; gingivitis; periodontal disease; epulis; hepatitis; tonsillitis; obesity; rhinitis; laryngitis; tracheitis; bronchitis; bronchiolitis; pneumonia; interstitial pulmonary fibrosis; pulmonary edema; neurodermitis; thyroiditis; thyroid enlargement; endometriosis; glomerulonephritis; gastritis; inflammatory bone and cartilage destruction; thromboembolic disease; and Buerger's disease.

Anti-angiogenesis can be demonstrated by any method known to those skilled in the art, such as the method described herein in Examples 5 and 6.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt,” is a salt formed from, for example, an acid and a basic group of one of the compounds of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5. Illustrative salts include, but are not limited, to sulfate, citrate, acetate, oxalate, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate, bisulfate, phosphate, acid phosphate, isonicotinate, lactate, salicylate, acid citrate, tartrate, oleate, tannate, pantothenate, bitartrate, ascorbate, succinate, maleate, besylate, gentisinate, fumarate, gluconate, glucaronate, saccharate, formate, benzoate, glutamate, methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, and pamoate (i.e., 1,1′-methylene-bis-(2-hydroxy-3-naphthoate)) salts. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” also refers to a salt prepared from a compound of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5 having an acidic functional group, such as a carboxylic acid functional group, and a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic base. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, hydroxides of alkali metals such as sodium, potassium, and lithium; hydroxides of alkaline earth metal such as calcium and magnesium; hydroxides of other metals, such as aluminum and zinc; ammonia, and organic amines, such as unsubstituted or hydroxy-substituted mono-, di-, or trialkylamines; dicyclohexylamine; tributyl amine; pyridine; N-methyl, N-ethylamine; diethylamine; triethylamine; mono-, bis-, or tris-(2-hydroxy-lower alkyl amines), such as mono-, bis-, or tris-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine, 2-hydroxy-tert-butylamine, or tris-(hydroxymethyl)methylamine, N,N,-di-lower alkyl-N-(hydroxy lower alkyl)-amines, such as N,N-dimethyl-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine, or tri-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine; N-methyl-D-glucamine; and amino acids such as arginine, lysine, and the like. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” also refers to a salt prepared from a compound of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5 having a basic functional group, such as an amine functional group, and a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid. Suitable acids include, but are not limited to, hydrogen sulfate, citric acid, acetic acid, oxalic acid, hydrochloric acid (HCl), hydrogen bromide (HBr), hydrogen iodide (HI), nitric acid, hydrogen bisulfide, phosphoric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, tartaric acid, bitartratic acid, ascorbic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, besylic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, glucaronic acid, formic acid, benzoic acid, glutamic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,” is a solvate formed from the association of one or more pharmaceutically acceptable solvent molecules to one of the compounds of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5. The term solvate includes hydrates (e.g., hemihydrate, monohydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate, tetrahydrate, and the like).

A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may contain inert ingredients which do not unduly inhibit the biological activity of the compounds. The pharmaceutically acceptable carriers should be biocompatible, i.e., non-toxic, non-inflammatory, non-immunogenic and devoid of other undesired reactions upon the administration to a subject. Standard pharmaceutical formulation techniques can be employed, such as those described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, ibid. Suitable pharmaceutical carriers for parenteral administration include, for example, sterile water, physiological saline, bacteriostatic saline (saline containing about 0.9% mg/ml benzyl alcohol), phosphate-buffered saline, Hank's solution, Ringer's-lactate and the like. Methods for encapsulating compositions (such as in a coating of hard gelatin or cyclodextran) are known in the art (Baker, et al., “Controlled Release of Biological Active Agents”, John Wiley and Sons, 1986).

As used herein, the term “effective amount” refers to an amount of a compound of this invention which is sufficient to reduce or ameliorate the severity, duration, progression, or onset of a proliferative disorder, prevent the advancement of a proliferative disorder, cause the regression of a proliferative, prevent the recurrence, development, onset or progression of a symptom associated with a proliferative disorder, or enhance or improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect(s) of another therapy. The precise amount of compound administered to a subject will depend on the mode of administration, the type and severity of the disease or condition and on the characteristics of the subject, such as general health, age, sex, body weight and tolerance to drugs. It will also depend on the degree, severity and type of cell proliferation, and the mode of administration. The skilled artisan will be able to determine appropriate dosages depending on these and other factors. When co-administered with other agents, e.g., when co-administered with an anti-cancer agent, an “effective amount” of the second agent will depend on the type of drug used. Suitable dosages are known for approved agents and can be adjusted by the skilled artisan according to the condition of the subject, the type of condition(s) being treated and the amount of a compound of the invention being used. In cases where no amount is expressly noted, an effective amount should be assumed.

Non-limiting examples of an effective amount of a compound of the invention are provided herein below. In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a method of preventing, treating, managing, or ameliorating a proliferative disorder or one or more symptoms thereof, said methods comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a dose of at least 150 μg/kg, preferably at least 250 μg/kg, at least 500 μg/kg, at least 1 mg/kg, at least 5 mg/kg, at least 10 mg/kg, at least 25 mg/kg, at least 50 mg/kg, at least 75 mg/kg, at least 100 mg/kg, at least 125 mg/kg, at least 150 mg/kg, or at least 200 mg/kg or more of one or more compounds of the invention once every day, preferably, once every 2 days, once every 3 days, once every 4 days, once every 5 days, once every 6 days, once every 7 days, once every 8 days, once every 10 days, once every two weeks, once every three weeks, or once a month.

The dosages of a chemotherapeutic agents other than compounds of the invention, which have been or are currently being used to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof, can be used in the combination therapies of the invention. Preferably, dosages lower than those which have been or are currently being used to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof, are used in the combination therapies of the invention. The recommended dosages of agents currently used for the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a proliferative disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof, can obtained from any reference in the art including, but not limited to, Hardman et al., eds., 1996, Goodman & Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis Of Basis Of Therapeutics 9th Ed, Mc-Graw-Hill, New York; Physician's Desk Reference (PDR) 57th Ed., 2003, Medical Economics Co., Inc., Montvale, N.J., which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

As used herein, the terms “treat”, “treatment” and “treating” refer to the reduction or amelioration of the progression, severity and/or duration of a proliferative disorder, or the amelioration of one or more symptoms (preferably, one or more discernible symptoms) of a proliferative disorder resulting from the administration of one or more therapies (e.g., one or more therapeutic agents such as a compound of the invention). In specific embodiments, the terms “treat”, “treatment” and “treating” refer to the amelioration of at least one measurable physical parameter of a proliferative disorder, such as growth of a tumor, not necessarily discernible by the patient. In other embodiments the terms “treat”, “treatment” and “treating” refer to the inhibition of the progression of a proliferative disorder, either physically by, e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom, physiologically by, e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter, or both. In other embodiments the terms “treat”, “treatment” and “treating” refer to the reduction or stabilization of tumor size or cancerous cell count.

As used herein, the terms “prevent”, “prevention” and “preventing” refer to the reduction in the risk of acquiring or developing a given proliferative disorder, or the reduction or inhibition of the recurrence or a proliferative disorder. In one embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered as a preventative measure to a patient, preferably a human, having a genetic predisposition to any of the disorders described herein.

As used herein, the terms “therapeutic agent” and “therapeutic agents” refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the treatment, management, or amelioration of a proliferative disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. In certain embodiments, the term “therapeutic agent” refers to a compound of the invention. In certain other embodiments, the term “therapeutic agent” refers does not refer to a compound of the invention. Preferably, a therapeutic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used for the treatment, management, prevention, or amelioration a proliferative disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. As used herein, the term “synergistic” refers to a combination of a compound of the invention and another therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent), which is more effective than the additive effects of the therapies. A synergistic effect of a combination of therapies (e.g., a combination of prophylactic or therapeutic agents) permits the use of lower dosages of one or more of the therapies and/or less frequent administration of said therapies to a subject with a proliferative disorder. The ability to utilize lower dosages of a therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) and/or to administer said therapy less frequently reduces the toxicity associated with the administration of said therapy to a subject without reducing the efficacy of said therapy in the prevention, management or treatment of a proliferative disorder. In addition, a synergistic effect can result in improved efficacy of agents in the prevention, management or treatment of a proliferative disorder. Finally, a synergistic effect of a combination of therapies (e.g., a combination of prophylactic or therapeutic agents) may avoid or reduce adverse or unwanted side effects associated with the use of either therapy alone.

As used herein, the phrase “side effects” encompasses unwanted and adverse effects of a therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent). Side effects are always unwanted, but unwanted effects are not necessarily adverse. An adverse effect from a therapy (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agent) might be harmful or uncomfortable or risky. Side effects include, but are not limited to fever, chills, lethargy, gastrointestinal toxicities (including gastric and intestinal ulcerations and erosions), nausea, vomiting, neurotoxicities, nephrotoxicities, renal toxicities (including such conditions as papillary necrosis and chronic interstitial nephritis), hepatic toxicities (including elevated serum liver enzyme levels), myelotoxicities (including leukopenia, myelosuppression, thrombocytopenia and anemia), dry mouth, metallic taste, prolongation of gestation, weakness, somnolence, pain (including muscle pain, bone pain and headache), hair loss, asthenia, dizziness, extra-pyramidal symptoms, akathisia, cardiovascular disturbances and sexual dysfunction.

As used herein, the term “in combination” refers to the use of more than one therapies (e.g., one or more prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents). The use of the term “in combination” does not restrict the order in which therapies (e.g., prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents) are administered to a subject with a proliferative disorder. A first therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent such as a compound of the invention) can be administered prior to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the administration of a second therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer agent) to a subject with a proliferative disorder, such as cancer.

As used herein, the terms “therapies” and “therapy” can refer to any protocol(s), method(s), and/or agent(s) that can be used in the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a proliferative disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. A used herein, a “protocol” includes dosing schedules and dosing regimens. The protocols herein are methods of use and include prophylactic and therapeutic protocols. As used herein, the terms “manage,” “managing,” and “management” refer to the beneficial effects that a subject derives from a therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent), which does not result in a cure of the disease. In certain embodiments, a subject is administered one or more therapies (e.g., one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents) to “manage” a disease so as to prevent the progression or worsening of the disease.

As used herein, a composition that “substantially” comprises a compound means that the composition contains more than about 80% by weight, more preferably more than about 90% by weight, even more preferably more than about 95% by weight, and most preferably more than about 97% by weight of the compound.

As used herein, a reaction that is “substantially complete” means that the reaction contains more than about 80% by weight of the desired product, more preferably more than about 90% by weight of the desired product, even more preferably more than about 95% by weight of the desired product, and most preferably more than about 97% by weight of the desired product.

As used herein, a racemic mixture means about 50% of one enantiomer and about 50% of is corresponding enantiomer relative to a chiral center in the molecule. The invention encompasses all enantiomerically-pure, enantiomerically-enriched, diastereomerically pure, diastereomerically enriched, and racemic mixtures of the compounds of the invention.

Enantiomeric and diastereomeric mixtures can be resolved into their component enantiomers or diastereomers by well known methods, such as chiral-phase gas chromatography, chiral-phase high performance liquid chromatography, crystallizing the compound as a chiral salt complex, or crystallizing the compound in a chiral solvent. Enantiomers and diastereomers can also be obtained from diastereomerically- or enantiomerically-pure intermediates, reagents, and catalysts by well known asymmetric synthetic methods.

The compounds of the invention are defined herein by their chemical structures and/or chemical names. Where a compound is referred to by both a chemical structure and a chemical name, and the chemical structure and chemical name conflict, the chemical structure is determinative of the compound's identity.

When administered to a patient, e.g., to a non-human animal for veterinary use or for improvement of livestock, or to a human for clinical use, the compounds of the invention are administered in isolated form or as the isolated form in a pharmaceutical composition. As used herein, “isolated” means that the compounds of the invention are separated from other components of either (a) a natural source, such as a plant or cell, preferably bacterial culture, or (b) a synthetic organic chemical reaction mixture. Preferably, the compounds of the invention are purified via conventional techniques. As used herein, “purified” means that when isolated, the isolate contains at least 95%, preferably at least 98%, of a compound of the invention by weight of the isolate either as a mixture of stereoisomers or as a diastereomeric or enantiomeric pure isolate.

As used herein, a composition that is “substantially free” of a compound means that the composition contains less than about 20% by weight, more preferably less than about 10% by weight, even more preferably less than about 5% by weight, and most preferably less than about 3% by weight of the compound.

Only those choices and combinations of substituents that result in a stable structure are contemplated. Such choices and combinations will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art and may be determined without undue experimentation. The invention can be understood more fully by reference to the following detailed description and illustrative examples, which are intended to exemplify non-limiting embodiments of the invention.

II. Compounds of the Invention

In one embodiment, a compound of the present invention is represented by the structural formula (Ia-c):

In formulas (Ia-c):

ring A is an aryl or a heteroaryl, optionally further substituted with one or more substituents in addition to R₃. Preferably, Ring A is represented one of the following tructural formulas:

where n is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; x is 0 or 1; and n+x is less than or equal to 4.

R₁ is —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. Preferably, R₁ is —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂ or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. More preferably, R₁ is —OH, —SH, or —NHR₇. Even more preferably, R₁, is —SH or —OH;

R₂ is an optionally substituted phenyl group. Preferably, R₂ is substituted with one or more group represented by R₃₀, wherein R₃₀, for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. More preferably, R₂ is an optionally substituted indolyl group or a phenyl group substituted with NR₁₀R₁₁ and optionally with at least one other substitutent represented by R₃₀;

R₃ is —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NHR₈, —C(O)SH, —S(O)OH, —S(O)₂OH, —S(O)NHR₈, —S(O)₂NHR₈, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. In another embodiment, —OR₂₆ and —SR₂₆, are additional values for R₃. Preferably, R₃ is —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂ or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. More preferably, R₃ is —OH, —SH, or —NHR₇. Even more preferably, R₃ is —SH or —OH;

R₅ is an optionally substituted heteroaryl; an optionally substituted 6 to 14-membered aryl; a bicyclic 9-member heterocycle optionally substituted at any substitutable nitrogen or carbon atoms. In another alternative, R₅ is represented by R₁₈, which is an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, or a substituted alkyl, wherein the alkyl group is substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁.

R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl;

R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl;

R₁₈ is an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, or a substituted alkyl, wherein the alkyl group is substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁;

R₂₆ is a lower alkyl;

p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or 2; and

m, for each occurrence, is independently, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

R₅ in structural formula (Ia) is preferably represented by structural formula (IIa):

In structural formula (IIa), R₉, for each occurrence, is independently a substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; or two R₉ groups taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a fused ring, and m is zero or an integer from 1 to 7. More preferably, substituent R₅ in structural formula (IIa) is represented by one of structural formulas (IIb) and (IIc):

In structural formulas (IIb) and (IIc) R₉ is as defined for formula (IIa), q is zero or an integer from 1 to 7 and u is zero or an integer from 1 to 8. The remainder of the variables in structural formulas (IIa), (IIb) and (IIc) has values defined above with reference to structural formula (I).

In another alternative, R₅ in structural formula (Ia) is represented by the structural formula (IIIa):

In structural formula (IIIa), R₃₃ is —H, a halo, lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower haloalkyl, a lower haloalkoxy, and lower alkyl sulfanyl; R₃₄ is H, a lower alkyl, or a lower alkylcarbonyl; and ring B and ring C are optionally substituted with one or more substituents. The remainder of the variables has values defined above with reference to structural formula (Ia).

In another alternative, R₅ in structural formula (Ia) is selected from a group listed in Table 1.

TABLE 1 Number Substituent R₅ 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

In the structural formulas of Table 1:

X₆, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N, N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least three X₆ groups are independently selected from CH and CR₉;

X₇, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N, N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least three X₇ groups are independently selected from CH and CR₉;

X₈, for each occurrence, is independently CH₂, CHR₉, CR₉R₉, O, S, S(O)_(p), NR₇, or NR₁₇;

X₉, for each occurrence, is independently N or CH;

X₁₀, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N, N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least one X₁₀ is selected from CH and CR₉;

R₉, for each occurrence, is independently a substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; or two R₉ groups taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a fused ring; and

R₁₇, for each occurrence, is independently —H, an alkyl, an aralkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, or —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁.

Preferred R₅ groups from Table 1 are selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted indolyl, an optionally substituted benzoimidazolyl, an optionally substituted indazolyl, an optionally substituted 3H-indazolyl, an optionally substituted indolizinyl, an optionally substituted quinolinyl, an optionally substituted isoquinolinyl, an optionally substituted benzoxazolyl, an optionally substituted benzo[1,3]dioxolyl, an optionally substituted benzofuryl, an optionally substituted benzothiazolyl, an optionally substituted benzo[d]isoxazolyl, an optionally substituted benzo[d]isothiazolyl, an optionally substituted thiazolo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted thiazolo[5,4-c]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted thiazolo[4,5-b]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted oxazolo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted oxazolo[5,4-c]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted oxazolo[4,5-b]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted oxazolo[5,4-b]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted imidazopyridinyl, an optionally substituted benzothiadiazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, an optionally substituted benzotriazolyl, an optionally substituted tetrahydroindolyl, an optionally substituted azaindolyl, an optionally substituted quinazolinyl, an optionally substituted purinyl, an optionally substituted imidazo[4,5-a]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted 3H-imidazo[4,5-b]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted 1H-imidazo[4,5-b]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted 3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, an optionally substituted pyridopyrdazinyl, and optionally substituted pyridopyrimidinyl, an optionally substituted pyrrolo[2,3]pyrimidyl, an optionally substituted pyrazolo[3,4]pyrimidyl an optionally substituted cyclopentaimidazolyl, an optionally substituted cyclopentatriazolyl, an optionally substituted pyrrolopyrazolyl, an optionally substituted pyrroloimidazolyl, an optionally substituted pyrrolotriazolyl, or an optionally substituted benzo(b)thienyl.

In another alternative, R₅ in structural formula (Ia) is a bicyclic 9-member heterocycle optionally substituted at any substitutable nitrogen or carbon atoms.

In another alternative, R₅ in structural formula (Ia) is selected from the group consisting of:

In formulas (IVa), (IVb) and (IVc):

X₁₁, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N, N(O), or N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least one X₁₁ is N, N(O), or N⁺(R₁₇) and at least two X₁₁ groups are independently selected from CH and CR₉;

X₁₂, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N, N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least one X₁₂ group is independently selected from CH and CR₉;

X₁₃, for each occurrence, is independently O, S, S(O)_(p), NR₇, or NR₁₇;

R₉, for each occurrence, is independently a substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; or two R₉ groups taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a fused ring; and R₁₇, for each occurrence, is independently an alkyl or an aralkyl. The remainder of the variables have values defined above with reference to structural formula (I).

In a preferred embodiment, the compound of the invention is represented by structural formula (Va):

In structural formula (Va):

X₁₀₁ is O, S, or NR₁₀₂ and X₁₀₂ is CR₁₀₄ or N. Preferably, X₁₀₁ is NR₁₀₂ and X₁₀₂ is CR₁₀₄. Alternatively, X₁₀₁ is NR₁₀₂ and X₁₀₂ is N;

Y, for each occurrence, is independently N or CR₁₀₃;

Y₁₀₁ is N or CR₁₀₅;

Y₁₀₂ is N, C or CR₁₀₆;

R₁ is OH, SH, or NHR₇. Preferably, R₁ is —OH or —SH;

R₆ is —H, —OH, —SH, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, an alkoxy or cycloalkoxy, a haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. Preferably, R₆ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, and C1-C6 cycloalkoxy, more preferably from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, and cyclopropoxy;

R₁₀₂ is —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —(CH₂)_(m)C(O)OR₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; preferably, R₁₀₂ is selected from the group consisting of —H, a C1-C6 alkyl, a C1-C6 cycloalkyl, —C(O)N(R₂₇)₂, and —C(O)OH, wherein R₂₇ is —H or a C1-C6 alkyl or from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, —C(O)OH, —(CH₂)_(m)C(O)OH, —CH₂OCH₃, —CH₂CH₂OCH₃, and —C(O)N(CH₃)₂;

R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ are, independently, —H, —OH, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; preferably, R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ are independently, selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, and cyclopropoxy;

R₁₀₅ is —H, —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁; preferably, R₁₀₅ is selected from the group consisting of —H, —OH, —SH, —NH₂, a C1-C6 alkoxy, a C1-C6 alkyl amino, and a C1-C6 dialkyl amino, more preferably from the group consisting of —H, —OH, methoxy and ethoxy; and

R₁₀₆, for each occurrence, is independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁.

The remainder of the variables of the compounds of structural formula (Va) has values defined above with reference to structural formula (Ia).

In one preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by formula (Va), X₁₀₁ is NR₁₀₂, R₁₀₂ is selected from the group consisting of —H, a C1-C6 alkyl, a C1-C6 cycloalkyl, —C(O)N(R₂₇)₂, and —C(O)OH, each R₂₇ is independently —H or a C1-C6 alkyl and the values for the remainder of the variables are as described above for formula (Va).

In a second preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by formula (Va), X₁₀₁ is NR₁₀₂, R₁₀₂ is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, —C(O)OH, —(CH₂)_(m)C(O)OH, —CH₂OCH₃, —CH₂CH₂OCH₃, and —C(O)N(CH₃)₂ and the values for the remainder of the variables are as described above for formula (Va).

In third preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by formula (Va), X₁₀₂ is CR₁₀₄; Y is CR₁₀₃; and R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a cycloalkenyl, an aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl ring. Preferably, R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a C₅-C₈ cycloalkenyl or a C₅-C₈ aryl and the values for the remainder of the variables are as described above for formula (Va).

In fourth preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by formula (Va), R₁ is —OH or —SH and the values for the remainder of the variables are as described above for formula (Va).

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor of the invention is represented by structural formula (Vb):

where X₁₀₃ is CR₁₀₄ or N and the remainder of the variables is defined above with reference with structural formulas (Va).

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor of the invention is represented by structural formula selected from (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c):

The values for the variables in structural formulas (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c) are as described in structural formula (Ia-c).

In one preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by structural formulas (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c):

R₅ is as described for structural formula (Ia), (IIa-c) or (Va-c) or a structural formula from Table 1;

R₆ and R₂₅, for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

n in structural formula (VIa-c) is zero or an integer from 1 to 4; n in structural formula (VIIa-c) is zero or an integer from 1 to 3;

x is 0 or 1;

n+x in structural formula (VI) is less than or equal to 4; and

the remainder of the variables in formulas (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c) have values defined above with reference to structural formula (Ia-c).

A second preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by structural formula (VIa-c), (VIIa-c) or (VIIIa-c) is provided in the following paragraphs:

R₂₅ is a halo, a haloalkyl, a haloalkoxy, a heteroalkyl, —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —(CH₂)_(k)OH, —(CH₂)_(k)SH, —(CH₂)_(k)NR₇H, —OCH₃, —SCH₃, —NHCH₃, —OCH₂CH₂OH, —OCH₂CH₂SH, —OCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —SCH₂CH₂OH, —SCH₂CH₂SH, —SCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇; and k is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and R₁, R₃, R₆ and the remainder of the variables are as described in the first preferred set of values for the variables in structural formulas (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c). Preferably, R₁ and R₃ are each, independently, —OH, —SH, or —NHR₇.

A third preferred set of values for the variables of the Hsp90 inhibitor represented by formula (VIa-c), (VIIa-c) or (VIIIa-c) is provided in the following paragraphs:

R₁ and R₃ are each, independently, —OH, —SH, or —NHR₇;

R₆ is an optionally substituted alkyl or cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, cyano, halo, nitro, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteroaralkyl, —OR₇, —SR₇, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇ and R₁ and R₃ and the remainder of the variables are as described in the second preferred set of values for the variables in structural formulas (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c).

In a fourth preferred set of values for the variables of Structural Formulas (VIa-c)-(VIIIa-c):

R₁ is —SH or —OH;

R₃ and R₂₅ are —OH;

R₆ is a C1-C6 alkyl, a C3-C6 cycloalkyl, a C1-C6 alkoxy, a C1-C6 haloalkoxy, a C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl, or —NR₁₀R₁₁; and

The remainder of the variables are as defined in Structural Formula (Ia-c).

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor is represented by a structural formula selected from (IXa)-(IXf):

In formulas (IXa) and (IXb):

R₅ is as described for structural formula (Ia), (IIa-c) or (Va-c) or a structural formula from Table 1;

X₃ and X₄ are each, independently, N, N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), CH or CR₆;

X₅ is O, S, NR₁₇, CH₂, CH(R₆), C(R₆)₂, CH═CH, CH═CR₆, CR₆═CH, CR₆═CR₆, CH═N, CR₆═N, CH═N(O), CR₆═N(O), N═CH, N═CR₆, N(O)═CH, N(O)═CR₆, N⁺(R₁₇)═CH, N⁺(R₁₇)═CR₆, CH═N⁺(R₁₇), CR₆═N⁺(R₁₇), or N═N, provided that at least one X₃, X₄ or X₅ is a heteroatom;

R₆, for each occurrence, is independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

R₁₇, for each occurrence, is independently an alkyl or an aralkyl; and n is zero or an integer from 1 to 4; and

the remainder of the variables has values defined above with reference to structural formulas (Ia-c).

Preferably, Hsp90 inhibitor of structural formulas (IXa)-(IXf) are selected from Table 2a-c.

TABLE 2a Number Compound 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

TABLE 2b Number Compound 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

TABLE 2c Number Compound 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

The values for the variables for the formulas in Tables 2a-c are as defined for structural formulas (IXa-f). Preferably, R₆ is a halo, a haloalkyl, a haloalkoxy, a heteroalkyl, —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —(CH₂)_(k)OH, —(CH₂)_(k)SH, —(CH₂)_(k)NR₇H, —OCH₃, —SCH₃, —NHCH₃, —OCH₂CH₂OH, —OCH₂CH₂SH, —OCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —SCH₂CH₂OH, —SCH₂CH₂SH, —SCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇; and k is 1, 2, 3, or 4.

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor of the present invention is represented by structural formula (X):

R₆ and R₂₅, for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. Preferably, R₆ is selected from an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, cyano, halo, nitro, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteroaralkyl, —OR₇, —SR₇, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇ and R₂₅ is as just described. The values for the remainder of the variables are as described for structural formulas (Ia-c).

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitors is represented by structural formulas (XIa) and (XIb):

The variables in formulas (XIa) and (XIb) are defined above with reference to formula (X).

A first preferred set of values for the variables of structural formula (XIa) and (XIb) is provided in the following paragraph:

R₁, R₃ or R₂₅ are each independently selected from —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂ or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂, and p, R₆, R₇, R₈, R₁₀, R₁₁ and R₃₀ are as described for structural formula (X). Preferably, when R₁, R₃ and R₂₅ have these values, R₁₀ and R₁₁, are preferably each independently a hydrogen, a C1-C6 straight or branched alkyl, optionally substituted by —OH, —CN, —SH, amino, a C1-C6 alkoxy, alkylsulfanyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino or a cycloalkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted nonaromatic, nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl; and p, R₆, R₇, and R₃₀ are as described for structural formula (X). More preferably, when R₁, R₃, R₁₀, R₁₁, and R₂₅ have these values, R₆ is preferably a C1-C6 alkyl, a C1-C6 haloalkyl, a C1-C6 alkoxy, a C1-C6 haloalkoxy, a C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl or a C3-C6 cycloalkyl; and p, R₇, R₈ and R₃₀ are as described for structural formula (X).

A second preferred set of values for the variables of structural formula (XIa) and (XIb) is provided in the following paragraph:

R₁ and R₃ are each independently —OH, —SH; R₆ is preferably a C1-C6 alkyl, a C1-C6 haloalkyl, a C1-C6 alkoxy, a C1-C6 haloalkoxy, a C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl or a C3-C6 cycloalkyl; R₁₀ and R₁₁ are preferably each independently a hydrogen, a C1-C6 straight or branched alkyl, optionally substituted by —OH, —CN, —SH, amino, a C1-C6 alkoxy, alkylsulfanyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino or a cycloalkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted nonaromatic, nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl; R₂₅ is —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂ or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂; and p, R₇, R₈ and R₃₀ are as described for structural formula (X). Preferably, R₃₀ is —OH, —SH, halogen, cyano, a C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 haloalkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, C1-C6 haloalkoxy or C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl and the remainder of the variables are as just described.

A third preferred set of values for the variables of structural formula (XIa) and (XIb) is provided in the following paragraph:

R₁, R₃ and R₂₅ are independently —SH or —OH; R₆ is cyclopropyl or isopropyl; R₁₀ and R₁₁ are each independently a hydrogen, a C1-C6 straight or branched alkyl, optionally substituted by —OH, —CN, —SH, amino, a C1-C6 alkoxy, alkylsulfanyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino or a cycloalkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted nonaromatic, nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl; and R₃₀ is —OH, —SH, halogen, cyano, a C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 haloalkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, C1-C6 haloalkoxy or C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl. Preferably, R₃₀ is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, methoxy or ethoxy. More preferably, R₁, R₃, R₆, R₂₅ and R₃₀ are as just described and R₁₀ and R₁₁ are each independently a hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, or taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, are:

wherein R₃₅ is —H, a C1-C4 alkyl or a C1-C4 acyl.

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor is represented by structural formulas (XIIa-b):

The values for the variables in structural formulas (XIIa-b) are as described for structural formulas (IXc-d). Preferably, R₃₀ is an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. More preferably, R₃₀ is an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, cyano, halo, nitro, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteroaralkyl, —OR₇, —SR₇, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —CN₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇.

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor is represented by structural formulas (XIIIa-d):

The values of the variables in structural formulas (XIIIa-d) are defined above with reference to structural formulas (XIIa-b).

A first preferred set of values for the variables in structural formulas (XIIIa-d) are as described in the following paragraphs:

R₁ and R₃ are each independently —OH, —SH, —HNR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂ or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

R₆, for each occurrence, is independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —OH, —SH, —HNR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂ or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. Preferably, R₆ is a C1-C6 alkyl, a C1-C6 haloalkyl, a C1-C6 alkoxy, a C1-C6 haloalkoxy, a C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl or a C3-C6 cycloalkyl; and

R₁₀ and R₁₁ and the remainder of the variables in structural formulas (XIIIa-d) are as described for structural formulas (XIIa-b). Preferably, R₁₀ and R₁₁ are each independently a hydrogen, a C1-C6 straight or branched alkyl, optionally substituted by —OH, —CN, —SH, amino, a C1-C6 alkoxy, alkylsulfanyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino or a cycloalkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted nonaromatic, nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl.

In another preferred embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor is represented by structural formulas (XIVa-p):

The values of the variables in structural formulas (XIVa-p) are defined above with reference to structural formulas (XIIIa-d).

A first preferred set of values for the variables in structural formulas (XIVa-p) are as described in the following paragraphs:

R₁ and R₃ are each independently —OH, —SH, —HNR₇;

R₆, is a C1-C6 alkyl, a C1-C6 haloalkyl, a C1-C6 alkoxy, a C1-C6 haloalkoxy, a C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl or a C3-C6 cycloalkyl;

R₁₀ and R₁₁ and the remainder of the variables in structural formulas (XIIIa-d) are as described for structural formulas (XIIa-b). Preferably, R₁₀ and R₁₁ are each independently a hydrogen, a C1-C6 straight or branched alkyl, optionally substituted by —OH, —CN, —SH, amino, a C1-C6 alkoxy, alkylsulfanyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino or a cycloalkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted nonaromatic, nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl; and

R₃₀ and the remainder of the variables in structural formulas (XIVa-p) are as described for structural formulas (XIIIa-d). Preferably, R₃₀ is —OH, —SH, halogen, cyano, a C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 haloalkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, C1-C6 haloalkoxy or C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl.

A second preferred set of values for the variables in structural formulas (XIVa-p) are as described in the following paragraphs:

R₁ and R₃ are independently —SH or —OH;

R₆ is cyclopropyl or isopropyl;

R₁₀ and R₁₁ are each independently a hydrogen, a C1-C6 straight or branched alkyl, optionally substituted by —OH, —CN, —SH, amino, a C1-C6 alkoxy, alkylsulfanyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino or a cycloalkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted nonaromatic, nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl;

R₃₀ is —OH, —SH, halogen, cyano, a C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 haloalkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, C1-C6 haloalkoxy or C1-C6 alkyl sulfanyl. Preferably, R₃₀ is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, methoxy or ethoxy; and

the remainder of the variables are as described for formulas (IXa-b). More preferably,

R₁₀ and R₁₁ are each independently a hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl,

or taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, are:

-   -   wherein R₃₅ is —H, a C1-C4 alkyl or a C1-C4 acyl.

In another embodiment, the Hsp90 inhibitor of the present invention is represented by structural formulas (XVa) and (XVb):

In formulas (XVa) and (XVb):

X₁₄ is O, S, or NR₇. Preferably, X₁₄ is O;

R₁ is —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, —SP(O)(OR₇)₂. Preferably, R₁ is —OH, —SH, or —NHR₇;

R₃ is —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)OH, —C(O)NHR₈, —C(O)SH, —S(O)OH, —S(O)₂OH, —S(O)NHR₈, —S(O)₂NHR₈, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl;

R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl;

R₂₁ is an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl. Preferably, R₂₁ is an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl. Alternatively, R₂₁ is

wherein

R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heteroaryl or heterocyclyl; and

R₃₀ is an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂;

n and q are independently an integer from 0 to 4; and

x is 0 or 1, provided that n+x less than or equal to 4.

R₂₂, for each occurrence, is independently —H or an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, a haloalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁. Preferably, R₂₂ is —H, an alkyl, an aralkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, or —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁; and

R₂₃ and R₂₄, for each occurrence, are independently —H, a substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁;

R₂₆ is a lower alkyl;

p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or 2; and

m, for each occurrence, is independently, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

III. Exemplary Compounds of the Present Invention

Tables 3, 4 and 5 provides examples of the compounds of the present invention.

TABLE 3 Number Structure 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

TABLE 4 Number Structure 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.

TABLE 5 Number Structure 1.

2.

3.

It is understood that the compounds of the present invention, including compounds of formulas (I) through (XV) and Tables 1-5 can be purified, isolated, obtained and used in a form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, a solvate, a clathrate, a tautomer or a prodrug.

For example, a compound of formula (I) can undergo the following tautomerization:

where X⁰ is O, S, or NR₇. It is understood that where a structural formula is depicted, all possible tautomeric forms of the compound are encompassed within that formula.

Similarly, prodrugs, i.e. compounds which can be metabolized or hydrolyzed in vivo to a compound of the present invention are encompassed by the present description. For example, the following embodiments of a compound of formula (I) can be produced in vivo in the following reaction:

One skilled in the art will understand that other hydrolyzable protecting groups can be employed with the compounds of the present invention to obtain prodrugs encompassed by the present description. IV. Methods for Making Compounds of the Invention

Compounds of the invention can be obtained via standard, well-known synthetic methodology, see e.g., March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992.

For example, compound 41 of Table 4 was prepared according to the Scheme (1):

The synthesis according Scheme (1) is performed as follows:

To a solution of 2,4-dihydroxy-1-ethylbenzene (1) (10 g, 72.5 mmol) in acetone (250 mL) was added K₂CO₃ (60 g, 435 mmol, 6 equiv.) and Me₂SO₄ (41 mL, 435 mmol, 6 equiv.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50° C. overnight, cooled to room temperature, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give compound (2) (7 g, 58%).

To a mixture of compound (2) (0.5 g, 3 mmol) in CS₂ (5 mL) at 0° C. was added BrCH₂COBr (0.3 mL, 3.6 mmol, 1 equiv.), AlCl₃ (0.5 g, 3.6 mmol, 1.2 equiv.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour, and poured into ice water. The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel to give compound (3) (0.466 g, 54% yield).

To a solution of potassium phthalimide (106 mg, 0.72 mmol, 3.6 equiv.) in DMF (1 mL) was added NaH (60% in mineral oil, 26 mg, 0.8 mmol, 4 equiv.) and compound (3) (60 mg, 0.2 mmol, 1 equiv.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 2 hours. The crude product was purified by chromatography to give compound (4) containing phthalimide (145 mg).

To a mixture of compound (4) (110 mg, 0.31 mmol) in EtOH (2 mL) was added hydrazine hydrate (0.05 mL, 1 mmol, 3 equiv.). The reaction was refluxed for 2.5 hours. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, and HCl (conc, 0.7 mL) was added. The resulting mixture was refluxed for another 0.5 hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0° C. and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and redissolved in EtOH (2 mL). The resulting mixture was filtered again at 0° C. to remove the precipitates. The filtrated was concentrated in vacuo, and pyridine (2 mL) and naphthyl isocyanate (0.05 mL, 0.35 mmol, 1.06 equiv.) were added. The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 3 hours, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel to give compound (6) (35 mg, 30% yield for two steps).

To a mixture of compound (6) (120 mg, 0.32 mmol, 1 eq) in DCM (5 mL) at 0° C. was added BBr₃ (0.3 mL, 3.2 mmol, 10 equiv.). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, and poured into ice water. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, dried over MgSO₄, concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography silica gel and then purified by chromatography on C18 to give 4-(5-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)-1H-imidazol-2(3H)-one (7) (70 mg, 63% yield).

Compound (7) is the compound 41 of Table 4:

4-(5-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)-1H-imidazol-2(3H)-one, having the following ¹H-NMR spectrum: ¹H NMR (300 MHz, acetone-d₆), δ (ppm): 9.61 (br., 1H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 7.93 (s, 1H), 7.8-7.9 (m, 3H), 7.3-7.5 (m, 4H), 6.99 (m, 1H), 6.53 (s, 1H), 6.25 (s, 1H), 2.15 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 0.68 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).

ESMS clcd for C₂₁H₁₈N₂O₃: 346.13; Found: 347.2 (M+H)⁺.

V. Uses of Compounds of the Invention

The present invention is directed to therapies which involve administering one of more compounds of the invention, and compositions comprising said compounds to a subject, preferably a human subject, to inhibit the activity of Hsp90 or to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorder, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof.

In one aspect, the invention provides a method of inhibiting the activity of Hsp90 in a cell, comprising administering to the cell an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a cell in a subject, preferably a mammal, and more preferably a human.

In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to treating cancers in which aberrant expression and/or activation of c-kit has been implicated as a contributing factor. The method comprises administering to a patient an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5.

In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to treating cancers in which expression of Bcr-Abl has been implicated as a contributing factor. The method comprises administering to a patient an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5.

In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to treating cancers in which aberrant expression and/or activation of flt-3 has been implicated as a contributing factor. The method comprises administering to a patient an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5.

In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to treating cancers in which aberrant expression and/or activation of EGFR has been implicated as a contributing factor. The method comprises administering to a patient an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5.

In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to treating cancers in which Hsp90 is over expressed compared with normal cells. The method comprises administering to a patient an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. Examples of cancers in which Hsp90 is over expressed include difuse large B-cell lymphomas (DLBCL).

In one aspect, the invention provides a method of inhibiting the activity of Hsp90 in a cell, comprising administering to the cell an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a cell in a subject, preferably a mammal, and more preferably a human.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method of treating or preventing a proliferation disorder in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent a proliferative disorder. In another embodiment, the proliferation disorder is cancer. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the additional therapeutic agent is an anticancer agent.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating cancer in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent cancer. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more additional therapeutic agents are anticancer agents.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating a c-kit associated cancer in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent the c-kit associated cancer. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more additional therapeutic agents are anticancer agents.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating a Bcr-Abl associated cancer in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent the Bcr-Abl associated cancer. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more additional therapeutic agents are anticancer agents.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating a flt3 associated cancer in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent the flt3 associated cancer. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more additional therapeutic agents are anticancer agents.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating an EGFR associated cancer in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent the EGFR associated cancer. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more additional therapeutic agents are anticancer agents.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating a cancer in a mammal which is characterized by the upregulation of Hsp90 compared to normal cells of the same type, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one embodiment, the compound is administered to a human to treat or prevent the cancer associated with the upregulation of Hsp90. In another embodiment, the cancer associated with the upregulation of Hsp90 is DLBCL. In another embodiment, the compound is administered with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In a preferred embodiment, the one or more additional therapeutic agents are anticancer agents.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for treating or inhibiting angiogenesis in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method of blocking, occluding, or otherwise disrupting blood flow in neovasculature, comprising contacting the neovasculature with an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one aspect, the neovasculature is in a subject and blood flow in the neovasculature is blocked, occluded, or otherwise disrupted in the subject by administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound represented by formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5. In one aspect, the subject is human.

1. c-Kit Associated Cancers

SCF binding to the c-kit protects hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells from apoptosis (Lee, et al., 1997, J. Immunol., 159:3211-3219, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), thereby contributing to colony formation and hematopoiesis. Expression of c-kit is frequently observed in acute myelocytic leukemia (AML) and sometimes observed in acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) (for reviews, see Sperling, et al., 1997, Haemat., 82:617-621; Escribano, et al., 1998, Leuk. Lymph., 30:459-466, the entire teachings of which are incorporated by reference). Although c-kit is expressed in the majority of AML cells, its expression does not appear to be prognostic of disease progression (Sperling, et al, 1997, Haemat. 82:617-621, the entire teachings of which are incorporated by reference). However, SCF protected AML cells from apoptosis induced by chemotherapeutic agents (Hassan, et al., 1996, Acta. Hem., 95:257-262, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Therefore, degradation of c-kit caused by the inhibition of Hsp90 by the compounds of the invention will enhance the efficacy of these agents and may induce apoptosis of AML cells.

The clonal growth of cells from patients with myelodysplastic syndrome (Sawada, et al., 1996, Blood, 88:319-327, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) or chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML) (Sawai, et al., 1996, Exp. Hem., 2:116-122, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) was found to be significantly enhanced by SCF in combination with other cytokines. CML is characterized by expansion of Philadelphia chromosome positive cells of the marrow (Verfaillie, et al., 1998, Leuk., 12:136-138, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), which appears to primarily result from inhibition of apoptotic death (Jones, 1997, Curr. Opin. One., 9:3-7, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). The product of the Philadelphia chromosome, BCR-ABL, has been reported to mediate inhibition of apoptosis (Bedi, et al., 1995, Blood, 86:1148-1158, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Since BCR-ABL and the c-kit RTK both inhibit apoptosis and p62 dok has been suggested as a substrate (Carpino, et al., 1997, Cell, 88:197-204, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), it is possible that clonal expansion mediated by these kinases occurs through a common signaling pathway. However, c-kit has also been reported to interact directly with BCR-ABL (Hallek, et al., 1996, Brit. J Haem., 94:5-16, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), which suggests that c-kit may have a more causative role in CML pathology. Therefore, degradation of c-kit caused by the inhibition of Hsp90 by the compounds of the invention will prove useful in the treatment of CML.

Normal colorectal mucosa does not express c-kit (Bellone, et al., 1997, J. Cell Physiol., 172:1-11, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). However, c-kit is frequently expressed in colorectal carcinoma (Bellone, et al., 1997, J. Cell Physiol., 172:1-11, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), and autocrine loops of SCF and c-kit have been observed in several colon carcinoma cell lines (Toyota, et al., 1993, Turn. Biol., 14:295-302; Lahm, et al., 1995, Cell Growth & Differ., 6:1111-1118; Bellone, et al., 1997, J. Cell Physiol., 172:1-11, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Furthermore, disruption of the autocrine loop by the use of neutralizing antibodies (Lahm, et al., 1995, Cell Growth & Differ., 6:1111-1118, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) and downregulation of c-kit and/or SCF significantly inhibits cell proliferation (Lahm, et al., 1995, Cell Growth & Differl., 6:1111-1118; Bellone, et al., 1997, J. Cell Physiol., 172:1-11, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference).

SCF/c-kit autocrine loops have been observed in gastric carcinoma cell lines (Turner, et al., 1992, Blood, 80:374-381; Hassan, et al., 1998, Digest. Dis. Science, 43:8-14, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference), and constitutive c-kit activation also appears to be important for gastrointestinal stromal tumors (GISTs). GISTs are the most common mesenchymal tumor of the digestive system. More than 90% of GISTs express c-kit, which is consistent with the putative origin of these tumor cells from interstitial cells of Cajal (ICCs) (Hirota, et al., 1998, Science, 279:577-580, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). The c-kit expressed in GISTs from several different patients was observed to have mutations in the intracellular juxtamembrane domain leading to constitutive activation (Hirota, et al., 1998, Science 279:577-580, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Therefore, degradation of c-kit caused by the inhibition of Hsp90 by the compounds of the invention will be an efficacious means for the treatment of these cancers.

Male germ cell tumors have been histologically categorized into seminomas, which retain germ cell characteristics, and nonseminomas which can display characteristics of embryonal differentiation. Both seminomas and nonseminomas are thought to initiate from a preinvasive stage designated carcinoma in situ (CIS) (Murty, et al., 1998, Sem. Oncol., 25:133-144, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Both c-kit and SCF have been reported to be essential for normal gonadal development during embryogenesis (Loveland, et al., 1997, J. Endocrinol., 153:337-344, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Loss of either the receptor or the ligand resulted in animals devoid of germ cells. In postnatal testes, c-kit has been found to be expressed in Leydig cells and spermatogonia, while SCF was expressed in Sertoli cells (Loveland, et al., 1997, J. Endocrinol., 153:337-344, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Testicular tumors develop from Leydig cells with high frequency in transgenic mice expressing human papilloma virus 16 (HPV16) E6 and E7 oncogenes (Kondoh, et al., 1991, J. Virol., 65:3335-3339; Kondoh, et al., 1994, J. Urol., 152:2151-2154, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). These tumors express both c-kit and SCF, and an autocrine loop may contribute to the tumorigenesis (Kondoh, et al., 1995, Oncogene, 10:341-347, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) associated with cellular loss of functional p53 and the retinoblastoma gene product by association with E6 and E7 (Dyson, et al., 1989, Science, 243:934-937; Wemess, et al., 1990, Science, 248:76-79; Scheffner, et al., 1990, Cell, 63:1129-1136, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Defective signaling mutants of SCF (Kondoh, et al., 1995, Oncogene, 10:341-347, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) or c-kit (Li, et al., 1996, Canc. Res., 56:4343-4346, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) inhibited formation of testicular tumors in mice expressing HPV16 E6 and E7. Since c-kit kinase activation is pivotal to tumorigenesis in these animals, the compounds of the invention which inhibit Hsp90 and thereby cause the degradation of c-kit will be useful for preventing or treating testicular tumors associated with human papilloma virus.

Expression of c-kit on germ cell tumors shows that the receptor is expressed by the majority of carcinomas in situ and seminomas, but c-kit is expressed in only a minority of nonseminomas (Strohmeyer, et al., 1991, Canc. Res., 51:1811-1816; Rajpert-de Meyts, et al., 1994, Int. J. Androl., 17:85-92; Izquierdo, et al., 1995, J. Pathol., 177:253-258; Strohmeyer, et al., 1995, J. Urol., 153:511-515; Bokenmeyer, et al., 1996, J. Cance. Res., Clin. Oncol., 122:301-306; Sandlow, et al., 1996, J. Androl., 17:403-408, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Therefore, degradation of c-kit caused by the inhibition of Hsp90 by the compounds of the invention will be an efficacious means for the treatment of these cancers.

SCF and c-kit are expressed throughout the central nervous system of developing rodents, and the pattern of expression suggests a role in growth, migration and differentiation of neuroectodermal cells. Expression of SCF and c-kit have also been reported in the adult brain (Hamel, et al., 1997, J. Neuro-One., 35:327-333, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Expression of c-kit has also been observed in normal human brain tissue (Tada, et al. 1994, J. Neuro., 80:1063-1073, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Glioblastoma and astrocytoma, which define the majority of intracranial tumors, arise from neoplastic transformation of astrocytes (Levin, et al., 1997, Principles & Practice of Oncology, 2022-2082, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Expression of c-kit has been observed in glioblastoma cell lines and tissues (Berdel, et al., 1992, Canc. Res., 52:3498-3502; Tada, et al., 1994, J. Neuro., 80:1063-1073; Stanulla, et al., 1995, Act. Neuropath., 89:158-165, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Therefore, degradation of c-kit caused by the inhibition of Hsp90 by the compounds of the invention will be an efficacious means for the treatment of these cancers.

The association of c-kit with astrocytoma pathology is less clear. Reports of expression of c-kit in normal astrocytes have been made (Natali, et al., 1992, Int. J. Canc., 52:197-201, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), (Tada, et al. 1994, J. Neuro., 80:1063-1073, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), while others report it is not expressed (Kristt, et al., 1993, Neuro., 33:106-115, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). In the former case, high levels of c-kit expression in high grade tumors were observed (Kristt, et al., 1993, Neuro., 33:106-115, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference), whereas in the latter case researchers were unable to detect any expression in astrocytomas. In addition, contradictory reports of c-kit and SCF expression in neuroblastomas also exist. One study found that neuroblastoma cell lines often express SCF, but rarely express c-kit. In primary tumors, c-kit was detected in about 8% of neuroblastomas, while SCF was found in 18% of tumors (Beck, et al., 1995, Blood, 86:3132-3138, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). In contrast, other studies (Cohen, et al., 1994, Blood, 84:3465-3472, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference) have reported that all 14 neuroblastoma cell lines examined contained c-kit/SCF autocrine loops, and expression of both the receptor and ligand were observed in 45% of tumor samples examined. In two cell lines, anti-c-kit antibodies inhibited cell proliferation, suggesting that the SCF/c-kit autocrine loop contributed to growth (Cohen, et al., 1994, Blood, 84:3465-3472, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). Therefore, degradation of c-kit caused by the inhibition of Hsp90 by the compounds of the invention will be an efficacious means for treating some cancers of the central nervous system.

2. Bcr-Abl Associated Cancers

The Philadelphia chromosome which generates the fusion protein Bcr-Abl is associated with the bulk of chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML) patients (more than 95%), 10-25% of acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) patients, and about 2-3% of acute myelogenous leukemias (AML). In addition, Bcr-Abl is a factor in a variety of other hematological malignancies, including granulocytic hyperplasia resembling CML, myelomonocytic leukemia, lymphomas, and erythroid leukemia (see Lugo, et al., MCB (1989), 9:1263-1270; Daley, et al., Science (1990), 247:824-830; and Honda, Blood (1998), 91:2067-2075, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference).

A number of different kinds of evidence support the contention that Bcr-Abl oncoproteins, such as p210 and p185 BCR-ABL, are causative factors in these leukemias (Campbell and Arlinghaus, “Current Status of Bcr Gene Involvement with Human Leukemia”, In: Advances in Cancer Research, Eds. Klein, VandeWoude, Orlando, Fla. Academic Press, Inc., 57:227-256, 1991, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). The malignant activity is due in large part to the Bcr-Abl protein's highly activated protein tyrosine kinase activity and its abnormal interaction with protein substrates (Arlinghaus et al., In: UCLA Symposia on Molecular and Cellular Biology New Series, Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Eds. R. P. Gale, D. Hoelzer, New York, N.Y., Alan R. Liss, Inc., 108:81-90, 1990, the entire teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference). The Bcr-Abl oncoprotein p210 Bcr-Abl is associated with both CML and ALL, whereas the smaller oncoprotein, p185 BCR-ABL, is associated with ALL patients, although some CML patients also express p185 (Campbell et al., 1991).

3. FLT3 Associated Cancers

FLT3 associated cancers are cancers in which inappropriate FLT3 activity is detected. FLT3 associated cancers include hematologic malignancies such as leukemia and lymphoma. In some embodiments FLT3 associated cancers include acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), B-precursor cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia, myelodysplastic leukemia, T-cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia, mixed lineage leukemia (MLL), or chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML).

4. EGFR Associated Cancers

EGFR associated cancers are cancers in which inappropriate EGFR activity (e.g., overexpression of EGFR or mutation of EGFR which causes constitutive tyrosine kinase activity) has been implicated as a contributing factor. Inappropriate EGFR activity has been associated with an adverse prognosis in a number of human cancers, such as neuroblastoma, intestine carcinoma such as rectum carcinoma, colon carcinoma, familiary adenomatous polyposis carcinoma and hereditary non-polyposis colorectal cancer, esophageal carcinoma, labial carcinoma, larynx carcinoma, hypopharynx carcinoma, tong carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, gastric carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, medullary thyroidea carcinoma, papillary thyroidea carcinoma, renal carcinoma, kidney parenchym carcinoma, ovarian carcinoma, cervix carcinoma, uterine corpus carcinoma, endometrium carcinoma, chorion carcinoma, pancreatic carcinoma, prostate carcinoma, testis carcinoma, breast carcinoma, urinary carcinoma, melanoma, brain tumors such as glioblastoma, astrocytoma, meningioma, medulloblastoma and peripheral neuroectodermal tumors, Hodgkin lymphoma, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, acute lymphatic leukemia (ALL), chronic lymphatic leukemia (CLL), acute myeloid leukemia (AML), chronic myeloid leukemia (CML), adult T-cell leukemia lymphoma, hepatocellular carcinoma, gall bladder carcinoma, bronchial carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, non-small cell lung carcinoma, multiple myeloma, basalioma, teratoma, retinoblastoma, choroidea melanoma, seminoma, rhabdomyo sarcoma, craniopharyngeoma, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, myosarcoma, liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, Ewing sarcoma and plasmocytoma.

In particular, EGFR appears to have an important role in the development of human brain tumors. A high incidence of overexpression, amplification, deletion and structural rearrangement of the gene coding for EGFR has been found in biopsies of brain tumors. In fact, the amplification of the EGFR gene in glioblastoma multiforme tumors is one of the most consistent genetic alterations known, with EGFR being overexpressed in approximately 40% of malignant gliomas and EGFRvIII mutation being found in about 50% of all glioblastomas.

In addition to gliomas, abnormal EGFR expression has also been reported in a number of squamous epidermoid cancers and breast cancers. Interestingly, evidence also suggests that many patients with tumors that over-express EGFR have a poorer prognosis than those having tumors that do not over-express EGFR.

Non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) includes squamous cell carcinomas, adenocarcinoma, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma (BAC), and large cell undifferentiated carcinoma. A subset of patients with NSCLC have been shown to have mutations in the tyrosine kinase domain of EGFR which is thought to be necessary for the maintenance of the disease. Treatment of this subset of patients with NSCLC with gefitinib, a tyrosine kinase inhibitor which targets EGFR, has shown rapid and dramatic clinical response.

Consequently, therapeutic strategies that can potentially inhibit or reduce the aberrant expression of EGFR are of great interest as potential anti-cancer agents.

5. Combination Therapies and Treatment of Refractory Cancers

The invention also provides methods of preventing, treating, managing, or ameliorating a proliferative disorder, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof, said methods comprising administering to a subject in need thereof one or more compounds of the invention and one or more other therapies (e.g., one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents that are currently being used, have been used, are known to be useful or in development for use in the prevention, treatment or amelioration of a proliferative disorder, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms associated with said proliferative disorder).

The prophylactic or therapeutic agents of the combination therapies of the invention can be administered sequentially or concurrently. In a specific embodiment, the combination therapies of the invention comprise one or more compounds and at least one other therapy (e.g., another prophylactic or therapeutic agent) which has the same mechanism of action as said compounds. In another specific embodiment, the combination therapies of the invention comprise one or more compounds of the invention and at least one other therapy (e.g., another prophylactic or therapeutic agent) which has a different mechanism of action than said compounds. In certain embodiments, the combination therapies of the present invention improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect of one or more compounds of the invention by functioning together with the compounds to have an additive or synergistic effect. In certain embodiments, the combination therapies of the present invention reduce the side effects associated with the therapies (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agents). In certain embodiments, the combination therapies of the present invention reduce the effective dosage of one or more of the therapies.

The prophylactic or therapeutic agents of the combination therapies can be administered to a subject, preferably a human subject, in the same pharmaceutical composition. In alternative embodiments, the prophylactic or therapeutic agents of the combination therapies can be administered concurrently to a subject in separate pharmaceutical compositions. The prophylactic or therapeutic agents may be administered to a subject by the same or different routes of administration.

In a specific embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds of the invention is administered to a subject, preferably a human, to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorder, such as cancer, or one or more symptom thereof. In accordance with the invention, pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may also comprise one or more other agents (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agents which are currently being used, have been used, or are known to be useful in the prevention, treatment or amelioration of a proliferative disorder or a symptom thereof).

The invention provides methods for preventing, managing, treating or ameliorating a proliferative disorder, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof in a subject refractory (either completely or partially) to existing agent therapies for such a proliferative disorder, said methods comprising administering to said subject a dose of an effective amount of one or more compounds of the invention and a dose of an effective amount of one or more therapies (e.g., one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents useful for the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a proliferative disorder or a symptom thereof). The invention also provides methods for preventing, treating, managing, or ameliorating a proliferative disorder or a symptom thereof by administering one or more compounds of the invention in combination with any other therapy(ies) to patients who have proven refractory to other therapies but are no longer on these therapies.

The compounds of the invention and/or other therapies can be administered to a subject by any route known to one of skill in the art. Examples of routes of administration include, but are not limited to, parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), intranasal, transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration.

VI. Agents Useful in Combination with the Compounds of the Invention

Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the compounds of the invention can be particularly effective at treating subjects whose cancer has become multi-drug resistant. Although chemotherapeutic agents initially cause tumor regression, most agents that are currently used to treat cancer target only one pathway to tumor progression. Therefore, in many instances, after treatment with one or more chemotherapeutic agents, a tumor develops multidrug resistance and no longer responds positively to treatment. One of the advantages of inhibiting Hsp90 activity is that several of its client proteins, which are mostly protein kinases or transcription factors involved in signal transduction, have been shown to be involved in the progression of cancer. Thus, inhibition of Hsp90 provides a method of short circuiting several pathways for tumor progression simultaneously. Therefore, it is believed that treatment of cancer with an Hsp90 inhibitor of the invention either alone, or in combination with other chemotherapeutic agents, is more likely to result in regression or elimination of the tumor, and less likely to result in the development of more aggressive multidrug resistant tumors than other currently available therapies.

In one embodiment, the compounds of the invention can be administered with agents that are tyrosine kinase inhibitors (e.g., gefitinib or erlotinib which inhibit EGFR tyrosine kinase activity). In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention can be administered to patients whose cancer has become resistant to a tyrosine kinase inhibitor (e.g., gefitinib or erlotinib). In this embodiment, the compounds of the invention can be administered either alone or in combination with the tyrosine kinase inhibitor.

In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention are useful for treating patients with hematological cancers that have become resistant to Imatinib, a chemotherapeutic agent that acts by inhibiting tyrosine kinase activity of Bcr-Abl. In patients with CML in the chronic phase, as well as in a blast crisis, treatment with Imatinib typically will induce remission. However, in many cases, particularly in those patients who were in a blast crisis before remission, the remission is not durable because the Bcr-Abl fusion protein develops mutations in the tyrosine kinase domain that cause it to be resistence to Imatinib. (See Nimmanapalli, et al., Cancer Research (2001), 61:1799-1804; and Gorre, et al., Blood (2002), 100:3041-3044, the entire teachings of each of these references are incorporated herein by reference). Compounds of the invention act by inhibiting the activity of Hsp90 which disrupt Bcr-Abl/Hsp90 complexes. When Bcr-Abl is not complex to Hsp90 it is rapidly degraded. Therefore, compounds of the invention are effective in treating Imatinib resistant leukemias since they act through a different mechanism than Imatinib. Compounds of the invention can be administered alone or with Imatinib in patients who have a Bcr-Abl associated cancer that is not resistant to Imatinib or to patients whose cancer has become resistant to Imatinib.

Anticancer agents that can be co-administered with the compounds of the invention include Taxol™, also referred to as “paclitaxel”, is a well-known anti-cancer drug which acts by enhancing and stabilizing microtubule formation, and analogs of Taxol™, such as Taxotere™. Compounds that have the basic taxane skeleton as a common structure feature, have also been shown to have the ability to arrest cells in the G2-M phases due to stabilization or inhibition of microtubules.

Other anti-cancer agents that can be employed in combination with the compounds of the invention include Adriamycin, Dactinomycin, Bleomycin, Vinblastine, Cisplatin, acivicin; aclarubicin; acodazole hydrochloride; acronine; adozelesin; aldesleukin; altretamine; ambomycin; ametantrone acetate; aminoglutethimide; amsacrine; anastrozole; anthramycin; asparaginase; asperlin; azacitidine; azetepa; azotomycin; batimastat; benzodepa; bicalutamide; bisantrene hydrochloride; bisnafide dimesylate; bizelesin; bleomycin sulfate; brequinar sodium; bropirimine; busulfan; cactinomycin; calusterone; caracemide; carbetimer; carboplatin; carmustine; carubicin hydrochloride; carzelesin; cedefingol; chlorambucil; cirolemycin; cladribine; crisnatol mesylate; cyclophosphamide; cytarabine; dacarbazine; daunorubicin hydrochloride; decitabine; dexormaplatin; dezaguanine; dezaguanine mesylate; diaziquone; doxorubicin; doxorubicin hydrochloride; droloxifene; droloxifene citrate; dromostanolone propionate; duazomycin; edatrexate; eflornithine hydrochloride; elsamitrucin; enloplatin; enpromate; epipropidine; epirubicin hydrochloride; erbulozole; esorubicin hydrochloride; estramustine; estramustine phosphate sodium; etanidazole; etoposide; etoposide phosphate; etoprine; fadrozole hydrochloride; fazarabine; fenretinide; floxuridine; fludarabine phosphate; fluorouracil; flurocitabine; fosquidone; fostriecin sodium; gemcitabine; gemcitabine hydrochloride; hydroxyurea; idarubicin hydrochloride; ifosfamide; ilmofosine; interleukin II (including recombinant interleukin II, or rIL2), interferon alfa-2a; interferon alfa-2b; interferon alfa-n1; interferon alfa-n3; interferon beta-I a; interferon gamma-I b; iproplatin; irinotecan hydrochloride; lanreotide acetate; letrozole; leuprolide acetate; liarozole hydrochloride; lometrexol sodium; lomustine; losoxantrone hydrochloride; masoprocol; maytansine; mechlorethamine hydrochloride; megestrol acetate; melengestrol acetate; melphalan; menogaril; mercaptopurine; methotrexate; methotrexate sodium; metoprine; meturedepa; mitindomide; mitocarcin; mitocromin; mitogillin; mitomalcin; mitomycin; mitosper; mitotane; mitoxantrone hydrochloride; mycophenolic acid; nocodazole; nogalamycin; ormaplatin; oxisuran; pegaspargase; peliomycin; pentamustine; peplomycin sulfate; perfosfamide; pipobroman; piposulfan; piroxantrone hydrochloride; plicamycin; plomestane; porfimer sodium; porfiromycin; prednimustine; procarbazine hydrochloride; puromycin; puromycin hydrochloride; pyrazofurin; riboprine; rogletimide; safingol; safingol hydrochloride; semustine; simtrazene; sparfosate sodium; sparsomycin; spirogermanium hydrochloride; spiromustine; spiroplatin; streptonigrin; streptozocin; sulofenur; talisomycin; tecogalan sodium; tegafur; teloxantrone hydrochloride; temoporfin; teniposide; teroxirone; testolactone; thiamiprine; thioguanine; thiotepa; tiazofurin; tirapazamine; toremifene citrate; trestolone acetate; triciribine phosphate; trimetrexate; trimetrexate glucuronate; triptorelin; tubulozole hydrochloride; uracil mustard; uredepa; vapreotide; verteporfin; vinblastine sulfate; vincristine sulfate; vindesine; vindesine sulfate; vinepidine sulfate; vinglycinate sulfate; vinleurosine sulfate; vinorelbine tartrate; vinrosidine sulfate; vinzolidine sulfate; vorozole; zeniplatin; zinostatin; zorubicin hydrochloride.

Other anti-cancer drugs that can be employed in combination with the compounds of the invention include: 20-epi-1,25 dihydroxyvitamin D3; 5-ethynyluracil; abiraterone; aclarubicin; acylfulvene; adecypenol; adozelesin; aldesleukin; ALL-TK antagonists; altretamine; ambamustine; amidox; amifostine; aminolevulinic acid; amrubicin; amsacrine; anagrelide; anastrozole; andrographolide; angiogenesis inhibitors; antagonist D; antagonist G; antarelix; anti-dorsalizing morphogenetic protein-1; antiandrogen, prostatic carcinoma; antiestrogen; antineoplaston; antisense oligonucleotides; aphidicolin glycinate; apoptosis gene modulators; apoptosis regulators; apurinic acid; ara-CDP-DL-PTBA; arginine deaminase; asulacrine; atamestane; atrimustine; axinastatin 1; axinastatin 2; axinastatin 3; azasetron; azatoxin; azatyrosine; baccatin III derivatives; balanol; batimastat; BCR/ABL antagonists; benzochlorins; benzoylstaurosporine; beta lactam derivatives; beta-alethine; betaclamycin B; betulinic acid; bFGF inhibitor; bicalutamide; bisantrene; bisaziridinylspermine; bisnafide; bistratene A; bizelesin; breflate; bropirimine; budotitane; buthionine sulfoximine; calcipotriol; calphostin C; camptothecin derivatives; canarypox IL-2; capecitabine; carboxamide-amino-triazole; carboxyamidotriazole; CaRest M3; CARN 700; cartilage derived inhibitor; carzelesin; casein kinase inhibitors (ICOS); castanospermine; cecropin B; cetrorelix; chlorlns; chloroquinoxaline sulfonamide; cicaprost; cis-porphyrin; cladribine; clomifene analogues; clotrimazole; collismycin A; collismycin B; combretastatin A4; combretastatin analogue; conagenin; crambescidin 816; crisnatol; cryptophycin 8; cryptophycin A derivatives; curacin A; cyclopentanthraquinones; cycloplatam; cypemycin; cytarabine ocfosfate; cytolytic factor; cytostatin; dacliximab; decitabine; dehydrodidemnin B; deslorelin; dexamethasone; dexifosfamide; dexrazoxane; dexverapamil; diaziquone; didemnin B; didox; diethylnorspermine; dihydro-5-azacytidine; 9-dioxamycin; diphenyl spiromustine; docosanol; dolasetron; doxifluridine; droloxifene; dronabinol; duocanriycin SA; ebselen; ecomustine; edelfosine; edrecolomab; eflornithine; elemene; emitefur; epirubicin; epristeride; estramustine analogue; estrogen agonists; estrogen antagonists; etanidazole; etoposide phosphate; exemestane; fadrozole; fazarabine; fenretinide; filgrastim; finasteride; flavopiridol; flezelastine; fluasterone; fludarabine; fluorodaunorunicin hydrochloride; forfenimex; formestane; fostriecin; fotemustine; gadolinium texaphyrin; gallium nitrate; galocitabine; ganirelix; gelatinase inhibitors; gemcitabine; glutathione inhibitors; hepsulfam; heregulin; hexamethylene bisacetamide; hypericin; ibandronic acid; idarubicin; idoxifene; idramantone; ilmofosine; ilomastat; imidazoacridones; imiquimod; immunostimulant peptides; insulin-like growth factor-1 receptor inhibitor; interferon agonists; interferons; interleukins; iobenguane; iododoxorubicin; ipomeanol, 4-; iroplact; irsogladine; isobengazole; isohomohalicondrin B; itasetron; jasplakinolide; kahalalide F; lamellarin-N triacetate; lanreotide; leinamycin; lenograstim; lentinan sulfate; leptolstatin; letrozole; leukemia inhibiting factor; leukocyte alpha interferon; leuprolide+estrogen+progesterone; leuprorelin; levamisole; liarozole; linear polyamine analogue; lipophilic disaccharide peptide; lipophilic platinum compounds; lissoclinamide 7; lobaplatin; lombricine; lometrexol; lonidamine; losoxantrone; lovastatin; loxoribine; lurtotecan; lutetium texaphyrin; lysofylline; lytic peptides; maitansine; mannostatin A; marimastat; masoprocol; maspin; matrilysin inhibitors; matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors; menogaril; merbarone; meterelin; methioninase; metoclopramide; MIF inhibitor; mifepristone; miltefosine; mirimostim; mismatched double stranded RNA; mitoguazone; mitolactol; mitomycin analogues; mitonafide; mitotoxin fibroblast growth factor-saporin; mitoxantrone; mofarotene; molgramostim; monoclonal antibody, human chorionic gonadotrophin; monophosphoryl lipid A+myobacterium cell wall sk; mopidamol; multiple drug resistance gene inhibitor; multiple tumor suppressor 1-based therapy; mustard anticancer agent; mycaperoxide B; mycobacterial cell wall extract; myriaporone; N-acetyldinaline; N-substituted benzamides; nafarelin; nagrestip; naloxone+pentazocine; napavin; naphterpin; nartograstim; nedaplatin; nemorubicin; neridronic acid; neutral endopeptidase; nilutamide; nisamycin; nitric oxide modulators; nitroxide antioxidant; nitrullyn; O6-benzylguanine; octreotide; okicenone; oligonucleotides; onapristone; ondansetron; ondansetron; oracin; oral cytokine inducer; ormaplatin; osaterone; oxaliplatin; oxaunomycin; palauamine; palmitoylrhizoxin; pamidronic acid; panaxytriol; panomifene; parabactin; pazelliptine; pegaspargase; peldesine; pentosan polysulfate sodium; pentostatin; pentrozole; perflubron; perfosfamide; perillyl alcohol; phenazinomycin; phenylacetate; phosphatase inhibitors; picibanil; pilocarpine hydrochloride; pirarubicin; piritrexim; placetin A; placetin B; plasminogen activator inhibitor; platinum complex; platinum compounds; platinum-triamine complex; porfimer sodium; porfiromycin; prednisone; propyl bis-acridone; prostaglandin J2; proteasome inhibitors; protein A-based immune modulator; protein kinase C inhibitor; protein kinase C inhibitors, microalgal; protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors; purine nucleoside phosphorylase inhibitors; purpurins; pyrazoloacridine; pyridoxylated hemoglobin polyoxyethylene conjugate; raf antagonists; raltitrexed; ramosetron; ras farnesyl protein transferase inhibitors; ras inhibitors; ras-GAP inhibitor; retelliptine demethylated; rhenium Re 186 etidronate; rhizoxin; ribozymes; RII retinamide; rogletimide; rohitukine; romurtide; roquinimex; rubiginone B1; ruboxyl; safingol; saintopin; SarCNU; sarcophytol A; sargramostim; Sdi 1 mimetics; semustine; senescence derived inhibitor 1; sense oligonucleotides; signal transduction inhibitors; signal transduction modulators; single chain antigen-binding protein; sizofuran; sobuzoxane; sodium borocaptate; sodium phenylacetate; solverol; somatomedin binding protein; sonermin; sparfosic acid; spicamycin D; spiromustine; splenopentin; spongistatin 1; squalamine; stem cell inhibitor; stem-cell division inhibitors; stipiamide; stromelysin inhibitors; sulfinosine; superactive vasoactive intestinal peptide antagonist; suradista; suramin; swainsonine; synthetic glycosaminoglycans; tallimustine; tamoxifen methiodide; tauromustine; tazarotene; tecogalan sodium; tegafur; tellurapyrylium; telomerase inhibitors; temoporfin; temozolomide; teniposide; tetrachlorodecaoxide; tetrazomine; thaliblastine; thiocoraline; thrombopoietin; thrombopoietin mimetic; thymalfasin; thymopoietin receptor agonist; thymotrinan; thyroid stimulating hormone; tin ethyl etiopurpurin; tirapazamine; titanocene bichloride; topsentin; toremifene; totipotent stem cell factor; translation inhibitors; tretinoin; triacetyluridine; triciribine; trimetrexate; triptorelin; tropisetron; turosteride; tyrosine kinase inhibitors; tyrphostins; UBC inhibitors; ubenimex; urogenital sinus-derived growth inhibitory factor; urokinase receptor antagonists; vapreotide; variolin B; vector system, erythrocyte gene therapy; velaresol; veramine; verdins; verteporfin; vinorelbine; vinxaltine; vitaxin; vorozole; zanoterone; zeniplatin; zilascorb; and zinostatin stimalamer. Preferred anti-cancer drugs are 5-fluorouracil and leucovorin.

Other chemotherapeutic agents that can be employed in combination with the compounds of the invention include but are not limited to alkylating agents, antimetabolites, natural products, or hormones. Examples of alkylating agents useful for the treatment or prevention of T-cell malignancies in the methods and compositions of the invention include but are not limited to, nitrogen mustards (e.g., mechloroethamine, cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, etc.), alkyl sulfonates (e.g., busulfan), nitrosoureas (e.g., carmustine, lomusitne, etc.), or triazenes (decarbazine, etc.). Examples of antimetabolites useful for the treatment or prevention of T-cell malignancies in the methods and compositions of the invention include but are not limited to folic acid analog (e.g., methotrexate), or pyrimidine analogs (e.g., Cytarabine), purine analogs (e.g., mercaptopurine, thioguanine, pentostatin). Examples of natural products useful for the treatment or prevention of T-cell malignancies in the methods and compositions of the invention include but are not limited to vinca alkaloids (e.g., vinblastin, vincristine), epipodophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide), antibiotics (e.g., daunorubicin, doxorubicin, bleomycin), enzymes (e.g., L-asparaginase), or biological response modifiers (e.g., interferon alpha).

Examples of alkylating agents that can be employed in combination with the compounds of the invention include but are not limited to, nitrogen mustards (e.g., mechloroethamine, cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, melphalan, etc.), ethylenimine and methylmelamines (e.g., hexamethlymelamine, thiotepa), alkyl sulfonates (e.g., busulfan), nitrosoureas (e.g., carmustine, lomusitne, semustine, streptozocin, etc.), or triazenes (decarbazine, etc.). Examples of antimetabolites useful for the treatment or prevention of cancer in the methods and compositions of the invention include but are not limited to folic acid analog (e.g., methotrexate), or pyrimidine analogs (e.g., fluorouracil, floxouridine, Cytarabine), purine analogs (e.g., mercaptopurine, thioguanine, pentostatin). Examples of natural products useful for the treatment or prevention of cancer in the methods and compositions of the invention include but are not limited to vinca alkaloids (e.g., vinblastin, vincristine), epipodophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide, teniposide), antibiotics (e.g., actinomycin D, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, bleomycin, plicamycin, mitomycin), enzymes (e.g., L-asparaginase), or biological response modifiers (e.g., interferon alpha). Examples of hormones and antagonists useful for the treatment or prevention of cancer in the methods and compositions of the invention include but are not limited to adrenocorticosteroids (e.g., prednisone), progestins (e.g., hydroxyprogesterone caproate, megestrol acetate, medroxyprogesterone acetate), estrogens (e.g., diethlystilbestrol, ethinyl estradiol), antiestrogen (e.g., tamoxifen), androgens (e.g., testosterone propionate, fluoxymesterone), antiandrogen (e.g., flutamide), gonadotropin releasing hormone analog (e.g., leuprolide). Other agents that can be used in the methods and compositions of the invention for the treatment or prevention of cancer include platinum coordination complexes (e.g., cisplatin, carboblatin), anthracenedione (e.g., mitoxantrone), substituted urea (e.g., hydroxyurea), methyl hydrazine derivative (e.g., procarbazine), adrenocortical suppressant (e.g., mitotane, aminoglutethimide).

Examples of anti-cancer agents which act by arresting cells in the G2-M phases due to stabilization or inhibition of microtubules and which can be used in combination with the compounds of the invention include without limitation the following marketed drugs and drugs in development: Erbulozole (also known as R-55104), Dolastatin 10 (also known as DLS-10 and NSC-376128), Mivobulin isethionate (also known as CI-980), Vincristine, NSC-639829, Discodermolide (also known as NVP-XX-A-296), ABT-751 (Abbott, also known as E-7010), Altorhyrtins (such as Altorhyrtin A and Altorhyrtin C), Spongistatins (such as Spongistatin 1, Spongistatin 2, Spongistatin 3, Spongistatin 4, Spongistatin 5, Spongistatin 6, Spongistatin 7, Spongistatin 8, and Spongistatin 9), Cemadotin hydrochloride (also known as LU-103793 and NSC-D-669356), Epothilones (such as Epothilone A, Epothilone B, Epothilone C (also known as desoxyepothilone A or dEpoA), Epothilone D (also referred to as KOS-862, dEpoB, and desoxyepothilone B), Epothilone E, Epothilone F, Epothilone B N-oxide, Epothilone A N-oxide, 16-aza-epothilone B, 21-aminoepothilone B (also known as BMS-310705), 21-hydroxyepothilone D (also known as Desoxyepothilone F and dEpoF), 26-fluoroepothilone), Auristatin PE (also known as NSC-654663), Soblidotin (also known as TZT-1027), LS-4559-P (Pharmacia, also known as LS-4577), LS-4578 (Pharmacia, also known as LS-477-P), LS-4477 (Pharmacia), LS-4559 (Pharmacia), RPR-112378 (Aventis), Vincristine sulfate, DZ-3358 (Daiichi), FR-182877 (Fujisawa, also known as WS-9885B), GS-164 (Takeda), GS-198 (Takeda), KAR-2 (Hungarian Academy of Sciences), BSF-223651 (BASF, also known as ILX-651 and LU-223651), SAH-49960 (Lilly/Novartis), SDZ-268970 (Lilly/Novartis), AM-97 (Armad/Kyowa Hakko), AM-132 (Armad), AM-138 (Armad/Kyowa Hakko), IDN-5005 (Indena), Cryptophycin 52 (also known as LY-355703), AC-7739 (Ajinomoto, also known as AVE-8063A and CS-39.HCl), AC-7700 (Ajinomoto, also known as AVE-8062, AVE-8062A, CS-39-L-Ser.HCl, and RPR-258062A), Vitilevuamide, Tubulysin A, Canadensol, Centaureidin (also known as NSC-106969), T-138067 (Tularik, also known as T-67, TL-138067 and TI-138067), COBRA-1 (Parker Hughes Institute, also known as DDE-261 and WHI-261), H10 (Kansas State University), H16 (Kansas State University), Oncocidin A1 (also known as BTO-956 and DIME), DDE-313 (Parker Hughes Institute), Fijianolide B, Laulimalide, SPA-2 (Parker Hughes Institute), SPA-1 (Parker Hughes Institute, also known as SPIKET-P), 3-IAABU (Cytoskeleton/Mt. Sinai School of Medicine, also known as MF-569), Narcosine (also known as NSC-5366), Nascapine, D-24851 (Asta Medica), A-105972 (Abbott), Hemiasterlin, 3-BAABU (Cytoskeleton/Mt. Sinai School of Medicine, also known as MF-191), TMPN (Arizona State University), Vanadocene acetylacetonate, T-138026 (Tularik), Monsatrol, Inanocine (also known as NSC-698666), 3-IAABE (Cytoskeleton/Mt. Sinai School of Medicine), A-204197 (Abbott), T-607 (Tularik, also known as T-900607), RPR-115781 (Aventis), Eleutherobins (such as Desmethyleleutherobin, Desaetyleleutherobin, Isoeleutherobin A, and Z-Eleutherobin), Caribaeoside, Caribaeolin, Halichondrin B, D-64131 (Asta Medica), D-68144 (Asta Medica), Diazonamide A, A-293620 (Abbott), NPI-2350 (Nereus), Taccalonolide A, TUB-245 (Aventis), A-259754 (Abbott), Diozostatin, (−)-Phenylahistin (also known as NSCL-96F037), D-68838 (Asta Medica), D-68836 (Asta Medica), Myoseverin B, D-43411 (Zentaris, also known as D-81862), A-289099 (Abbott), A-318315 (Abbott), HTI-286 (also known as SPA-110, trifluoroacetate salt) (Wyeth), D-82317 (Zentaris), D-82318 (Zentaris), SC-12983 (NCI), Resverastatin phosphate sodium, BPR-0Y-007 (National Health Research Institutes), and SSR-250411 (Sanofi).

VII. Compositions and Methods for Administering Therapies

The present invention provides compositions for the treatment, prophylaxis, and amelioration of proliferative disorders, such as cancer. In a specific embodiment, a composition comprises one or more compounds of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate or prodrug thereof. In another embodiment, a composition of the invention comprises one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents other than a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, prodrug thereof. In another embodiment, a composition of the invention comprises one or more compounds of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate or prodrug thereof, and one or more other prophylactic or therapeutic agents. In another embodiment, the composition comprises a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.

In a preferred embodiment, a composition of the invention is a pharmaceutical composition or a single unit dosage form. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention comprise one or more active ingredients in relative amounts and formulated in such a way that a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form can be used to treat or prevent proliferative disorders, such as cancer. Preferred pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise a compound of formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5 or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, or prodrug thereof, optionally in combination with one or more additional active agents.

A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include, but are not limited to, parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), intranasal, transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. In a specific embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, oral, intranasal or topical administration to human beings. In a preferred embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures for subcutaneous administration to human beings.

Single unit dosage forms of the invention are suitable for oral, mucosal (e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal), parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial), or transdermal administration to a patient. Examples of dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal administration to a patient, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspensions, oil-in-water emulsions, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amorphous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient.

The composition, shape, and type of dosage forms of the invention will typically vary depending on their use. For example, a dosage form suitable for mucosal administration may contain a smaller amount of active ingredient(s) than an oral dosage form used to treat the same indication. This aspect of the invention will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1990) 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton, Pa.

Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more excipients. Suitable excipients are well known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients are provided herein. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for incorporation into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a patient. For example, oral dosage forms such as tablets may contain excipients not suited for use in parenteral dosage forms.

The suitability of a particular excipient may also depend on the specific active ingredients in the dosage form. For example, the decomposition of some active ingredients can be accelerated by some excipients such as lactose, or when exposed to water. Active ingredients that comprise primary or secondary amines (e.g., N-desmethylvenlafaxine and N,N-didesmethylvenlafaxine) are particularly susceptible to such accelerated decomposition. Consequently, this invention encompasses pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that contain little, if any, lactose. As used herein, the term “lactose-free” means that the amount of lactose present, if any, is insufficient to substantially increase the degradation rate of an active ingredient. Lactose-free compositions of the invention can comprise excipients that are well known in the art and are listed, for example, in the U.S. Pharmocopia (USP) SP (XXI)/NF (XVI). In general, lactose-free compositions comprise active ingredients, a binder/filler, and a lubricant in pharmaceutically compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable amounts. Preferred lactose-free dosage forms comprise active ingredients, microcrystalline cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, and magnesium stearate.

This invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, the addition of water (e.g., 5%) is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen (1995) Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, N.Y., 379-80. In effect, water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds. Thus, the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.

Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine are preferably anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.

An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions are preferably packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.

The invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose. Such compounds, which are referred to herein as “stabilizer” include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.

VIIA. Oral Dosage Forms

Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention that are suitable for oral administration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups). Such dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1990) 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa.

Typical oral dosage forms of the invention are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. For example, excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents. Examples of excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms (e.g., powders, tablets, capsules, and caplets) include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.

Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.

For example, a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.

Examples of excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants. Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.

Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101, AVICEL-PH-103 AVICEL RC-581, AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, Pa.), and mixtures thereof. One specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581. Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL-PH-103J and Starch 1500 LM.

Examples of fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof. The binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form.

Disintegrants are used in the compositions of the invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms of the invention. The amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, preferably from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.

Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.

Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, Md.), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Plano, Tex.), CAB-O-SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, Mass.), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated.

VIIB. Controlled Release Dosage Forms

Active ingredients of the invention can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, 5,354,556, and 5,733,566, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions. Suitable controlled-release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients of the invention. The invention thus encompasses single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for controlled-release.

All controlled-release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled counterparts. Ideally, the use of an optimally designed controlled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time. Advantages of controlled-release formulations include extended activity of the drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance.

Most controlled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body. Controlled-release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.

A particular extended release formulation of this invention comprises a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof, in spheroids which further comprise microcrystalline cellulose and, optionally, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose coated with a mixture of ethyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. Such extended release formulations can be prepared according to U.S. Pat. No. 6,274,171, the entirely of which is incorporated herein by reference.

A specific controlled-release formulation of this invention comprises from about 6% to about 40% a compound of formulas (I)-(XV), including Tables 1-5, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof, by weight, about 50% to about 94% microcrystalline cellulose, NF, by weight, and optionally from about 0.25% to about 1% by weight of hydroxypropyl-methylcellulose, USP, wherein the spheroids are coated with a film coating composition comprised of ethyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose.

VIIC. Parenteral Dosage Forms

Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to patients by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), intramuscular, and intraarterial. Because their administration typically bypasses patients' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are preferably sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a patient. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions.

Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms of the invention are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water-miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non-aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate.

Compounds that increase the solubility of one or more of the active ingredients disclosed herein can also be incorporated into the parenteral dosage forms of the invention.

VIID. Transdermal, Topical, and Mucosal Dosage Forms

Transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays, aerosols, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1980 & 1990) 16th and 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (1985) 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia. Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels. Further, transdermal dosage forms include “reservoir type” or “matrix type” patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.

Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane-1,3-diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1980 & 1990) 16th and 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton, Pa.

Depending on the specific tissue to be treated, additional components may be used prior to, in conjunction with, or subsequent to treatment with active ingredients of the invention. For example, penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue. Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tetrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water-soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).

The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. In this regard, stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.

VIIE. Dosage & Frequency of Administration

The amount of the compound or composition of the invention which will be effective in the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a proliferative disorders, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof, will vary with the nature and severity of the disease or condition, and the route by which the active ingredient is administered. The frequency and dosage will also vary according to factors specific for each patient depending on the specific therapy (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic agents) administered, the severity of the disorder, disease, or condition, the route of administration, as well as age, body, weight, response, and the past medical history of the patient. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems. Suitable regiments can be selected by one skilled in the art by considering such factors and by following, for example, dosages reported in the literature and recommended in the Physician's Desk Reference (57th ed., 2003).

Exemplary doses of a small molecule include milligram or microgram amounts of the small molecule per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g., about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 5 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram).

In general, the recommended daily dose range of a compound of the invention for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.01 mg to about 1000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose preferably as divided doses throughout a day. In one embodiment, the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses. Specifically, a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more specifically, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day. In managing the patient, the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to about 200 mg to about 1000 mg per day as either a single dose or divided doses, depending on the patient's global response. It may be necessary to use dosages of the active ingredient outside the ranges disclosed herein in some cases, as will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. Furthermore, it is noted that the clinician or treating physician will know how and when to interrupt, adjust, or terminate therapy in conjunction with individual patient response.

Different therapeutically effective amounts may be applicable for different proliferative disorders, as will be readily known by those of ordinary skill in the art. Similarly, amounts sufficient to prevent, manage, treat or ameliorate such proliferative disorders, but insufficient to cause, or sufficient to reduce, adverse effects associated with the compounds of the invention are also encompassed by the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. Further, when a patient is administered multiple dosages of a compound of the invention, not all of the dosages need be the same. For example, the dosage administered to the patient may be increased to improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect of the compound or it may be decreased to reduce one or more side effects that a particular patient is experiencing.

In a specific embodiment, the dosage of the composition of the invention or a compound of the invention administered to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorders, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof in a patient is 150 μg/kg, preferably 250 μg/kg, 500 μg/kg, 1 mg/kg, 5 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg, 25 mg/kg, 50 mg/kg, 75 mg/kg, 100 mg/kg, 125 mg/kg, 150 mg/kg, or 200 mg/kg or more of a patient's body weight. In another embodiment, the dosage of the composition of the invention or a compound of the invention administered to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorders, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof in a patient is a unit dose of 0.1 mg to 20 mg, 0.1 mg to 15 mg, 0.1 mg to 12 mg, 0.1 mg to 10 mg, 0.1 mg to 8 mg, 0.1 mg to 7 mg, 0.1 mg to 5 mg, 0.1 to 2.5 mg, 0.25 mg to 20 mg, 0.25 to 15 mg, 0.25 to 12 mg, 0.25 to 10 mg, 0.25 to 8 mg, 0.25 mg to 7 mg, 0.25 mg to 5 mg, 0.5 mg to 2.5 mg, 1 mg to 20 mg, 1 mg to 15 mg, 1 mg to 12 mg, 1 mg to 10 mg, 1 mg to 8 mg, 1 mg to 7 mg, 1 mg to 5 mg, or 1 mg to 2.5 mg.

The dosages of prophylactic or therapeutic agents other than compounds of the invention, which have been or are currently being used to prevent, treat, manage, or proliferative disorders, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof can be used in the combination therapies of the invention. Preferably, dosages lower than those which have been or are currently being used to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a proliferative disorders, or one or more symptoms thereof, are used in the combination therapies of the invention. The recommended dosages of agents currently used for the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a proliferative disorders, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof, can obtained from any reference in the art including, but not limited to, Hardman et al., eds., 1996, Goodman & Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis Of Basis Of Therapeutics 9^(th) Ed, Mc-Graw-Hill, New York; Physician's Desk Reference (PDR) 57^(th) Ed., 2003, Medical Economics Co., Inc., Montvale, N.J., which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In certain embodiments, when the compounds of the invention are administered in combination with another therapy, the therapies (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agents) are administered less than 5 minutes apart, less than 30 minutes apart, 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour apart, at about 1 to about 2 hours apart, at about 2 hours to about 3 hours apart, at about 3 hours to about 4 hours apart, at about 4 hours to about 5 hours apart, at about 5 hours to about 6 hours apart, at about 6 hours to about 7 hours apart, at about 7 hours to about 8 hours apart, at about 8 hours to about 9 hours apart, at about 9 hours to about 10 hours apart, at about 10 hours to about 11 hours apart, at about 11 hours to about 12 hours apart, at about 12 hours to 18 hours apart, 18 hours to 24 hours apart, 24 hours to 36 hours apart, 36 hours to 48 hours apart, 48 hours to 52 hours apart, 52 hours to 60 hours apart, 60 hours to 72 hours apart, 72 hours to 84 hours apart, 84 hours to 96 hours apart, or 96 hours to 120 hours part. In one embodiment, two or more therapies (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agents) are administered within the same patient visit.

In certain embodiments, one or more compounds of the invention and one or more other the therapies (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agents) are cyclically administered. Cycling therapy involves the administration of a first therapy (e.g., a first prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time, followed by the administration of a second therapy (e.g., a second prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time, followed by the administration of a third therapy (e.g., a third prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time and so forth, and repeating this sequential administration, i.e., the cycle in order to reduce the development of resistance to one of the agents, to avoid or reduce the side effects of one of the agents, and/or to improve the efficacy of the treatment.

In certain embodiments, administration of the same compound of the invention may be repeated and the administrations may be separated by at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months. In other embodiments, administration of the same prophylactic or therapeutic agent may be repeated and the administration may be separated by at least at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months.

In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a method of preventing, treating, managing, or ameliorating a proliferative disorders, such as cancer, or one or more symptoms thereof, said methods comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a dose of at least 150 μg/kg, preferably at least 250 μg/kg, at least 500 μg/kg, at least 1 mg/kg, at least 5 mg/kg, at least 10 mg/kg, at least 25 mg/kg, at least 50 mg/kg, at least 75 mg/kg, at least 100 mg/kg, at least 125 mg/kg, at least 150 mg/kg, or at least 200 mg/kg or more of one or more compounds of the invention once every day, preferably, once every 2 days, once every 3 days, once every 4 days, once every 5 days, once every 6 days, once every 7 days, once every 8 days, once every 10 days, once every two weeks, once every three weeks, or once a month.

EXEMPLIFICATION Example 1 A Compound of the Present Inhibits of Hsp90 in Malachite Green Assay

Hsp90 protein is obtained from Stressgen (Cat#SPP-770). Assay buffer: 100 mM Tris-HCl, Ph7.4, 20 mM KCl, 6 mM MgCl₂. Malachite green (0.0812% w/v) (M9636) and polyviny alcohol USP (2.32% w/v) (P1097) are obtained from Sigma. A Malachite Green Assay (see Methods Mol Med, 2003, 85:149 for method details) is used for examination of ATPase activity of Hsp90 protein. Briefly, Hsp90 protein in assay buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, Ph7.4, 20 mM KCl, 6 mM MgCl₂) is mixed with ATP alone (negative control) or in the presence of Geldanamycin (a positive control) or a compound of the invention in a 96-well plate. Malachite green reagent is added to the reaction. The mixtures is incubated at 37° C. for 4 hours and sodium citrate buffer (34% w/v sodium citrate) was added to the reaction. The plate is read by an ELISA reader with an absorbance at 620 nm.

Example 2 Inhibition of Hsp90 Activity by a Compound of the Present Invention Results in Degradation of Her2

Cells and Cell Culture

Human high-Her2 breast carcinoma BT474 (HTB-20), SK-BR-3 (HTB-30) and MCF-7 breast carcinoma (HTB-22) from American Type Culture Collection, VA, USA are grown in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium with 4 mM L-glutamine and antibiotics (100 IU/ml penicillin and 100 ug/ml streptomycine; GibcoBRL). To obtain exponential cell growth, cells are trypsinized, counted and seeded at a cell density of 0.5×10⁶ cells/ml regularly, every 3 days. All experiments are performed on day 1 after cell passage.

Degradation of Her2 in Cells after Treatment with a Compound of the Invention

1. Method 1

BT-474 cells are treated with 0.5 μM, 2 μM, or 5 μM of 17AAG (a positive control) or 0.5 μM, 2 μM, or 5 μM of a compound of the invention overnight in DMEM medium. After treatment, each cytoplasmic sample is prepared from 1×10⁶ cells by incubation of cell lysis buffer (#9803, cell Signaling Technology) on ice for 10 minutes. The resulting supernatant used as the cytosol fractions is dissolved with sample buffer for SDS-PAGE and run on a SDS-PAGE gel, blotted onto a nitrocellulose membrane by using semi-dry transfer. Non-specific binding to nitrocellulose is blocked with 5% skim milk in TBS with 0.5% Tween at room temperature for 1 hour, then probed with anti-Her2/ErB2 mAb (rabbit IgG, #2242, Cell Signaling) and anti-Tubulin (T9026, Sigma) as housekeeping control protein. HRP-conjugated goat anti-rabbit IgG (H+L) and HRP-conjugated horse anti-mouse IgG (H+L) are used as secondary Ab (#7074, #7076, Cell Signaling) and LumiGLO reagent, 20× Peroxide (#7003, Cell Signaling) is used for visualization.

Her2, an Hsp90 client protein, is expected to be degraded when cells are treated with compounds of the invention. 0.5 μM of 17AAG, a known Hsp90 inhibitor which is used as a positive control, causes partial degradation of Her2.

2. Method 2

Mv-4-11 cells (20,000 cells/well) are cultured in 96-well plates and maintained at 37° C. for several hours. The cells are treated with a compound of the invention or 17AAG (a positive control) at various concentrations and incubated at 37° C. for 72 hours. Cell survival is measured with Cell Counting Kit-8 (Dojindo Laboratories, Cat. # CK04).

Fluorescent Staining of Her2 on the Surface of Cells Treated with a Compound of the Invention

After treatment with a compound of the invention, cells are washed twice with 1×PBS/1% FBS, and then stained with anti-Her2-FITC (#340553, BD) for 30 min at 4° C. Cells are then washed three times in FACS buffer before the fixation in 0.5 ml 1% paraformadehydrede. Data is acquired on a FACSCalibur system. Isotype-matched controls is used to establish the non-specific staining of samples and to set the fluorescent markers. A total 10,000 events is recorded from each sample. Data is analysed by using CellQuest software (BD Biosciences).

Apoptosis Analysis

After treatment with the compounds of the invention, cells are washed once with 1×PBS/1% FBS, and then stained in binding buffer with FITC-conjugated Annexin V and Propidium iodide (PI) (all obtained from BD Biosciences) for 30 min at 4° C. Flow cytometric analysis is performed with FACSCalibur (BD Biosciences) and a total 10,000 events were recorded from each sample. Data is analyzed by using CellQuest software (BD Biosciences). The relative fluorescence is calculated after subtraction of the fluorescence of control.

Example 3 Necrosis in a Nude Mouse Tumor Model

The mouse mammary carcinoma cell line, EMT6 (ATCC #CRL-2755), is obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; Manassas, Va., USA). The cell line is cultured in growth media prepared from 50% Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium (high glucose), 50% RPMI Media 1640, 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 1% 100× L-glutamine, 1% 100× Penicillin-Streptomycin, 1% 100× sodium pyruvate and 1% 100×MEM non-essential amino acids. FBS is obtained from ATCC and all other reagents are obtained from Invitrogen Corp. (Carlsbad, Calif., USA). Approximately 4-5×10(6) cells that have been cryopreserved in liquid nitrogen are rapidly thawed at 37° C. and transferred to a 175 cm² tissue culture flask containing 50 ml of growth media and then incubated at 37° C. in a 5% CO₂ incubator. The growth media is replaced every 2-3 days until the flask became 90% confluent, typically in 5-7 days. To passage and expand the cell line, a 90% confluent flask is washed with 10 ml of room temperature phosphate buffered saline (PBS) and the cells are disassociated by adding 5 ml 1× Trypsin-EDTA (Invitrogen) and incubating at 37° C. until the cells detach from the surface of the flask. To inactivate the trypsin, 5 ml of growth media is added and then the contents of the flask are centrifuged to pellet the cells. The supernatant is aspirated and the cell pellet is resuspended in 10 ml of growth media and the cell number determined using a hemocytometer. Approximately 1-3×10(6) cells per flask are seeded into 175 cm² flasks containing 50 ml of growth media and incubated at 37° C. in a 5% CO₂ incubator. When the flasks reach 90% confluence, the above passaging process is repeated until sufficient cells have been obtained for implantation into mice.

Seven to eight week old, female Crl:CD-1-nuBR (nude) mice are obtained from Charles River Laboratories (Wilmington, Mass., USA). Animals are housed 4-5/cage in micro-isolators, with a 12 hr/12 hr light/dark cycle, acclimated for at least 1 week prior to use and fed normal laboratory chow ad libitum. Studies are conducted on animals between 8 and 10 weeks of age at implantation. To implant EMT6 tumor cells into nude mice, the cells are trypsinized as above, washed in PBS and resusupended at a concentration of 10×10(6) cells/ml in PBS. Using a 27 gauge needle and 1 cc syringe, 0.1 ml of the cell suspension is injected subcutaneously into the flank of each nude mouse.

Tumors are then permitted to develop in vivo until the majority reached 75-125 mm³ in tumor volume, which typically requires 1 week following implantation. Animals with oblong, very small or large tumors are discarded, and only animals carrying tumors that display consistent growth rates are selected for studies. Tumor volumes (V) are calculated by caliper measurement of the width (W), length (L) and thickness (T) of tumors using the following formula: V=0.5236×(L×W×T). Animals are randomized into treatment groups so that each group had median tumor volumes of ˜100 mm³ at the start of dosing.

To formulate a compound of the invention in DRD, a stock solution of the test article is prepared by dissolving an appropriate amount of the compound in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) by sonication in an ultrasonic water bath. A solution of 20% Cremophore RH40 (polyoxyl 40 hydrogenated castor oil; BASF Corp., Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Germany) in 5% dextrose in water (Abbott Laboratories, North Chicago, Ill., USA) is also prepared by first heating 100% Cremophore RH40 at 50-60° C. until liquefied and clear, diluting 1:5 with 100% D5W, reheating again until clear and then mixing well. This solution is stored at room temperature for up to 3 months prior to use. To prepare a DRD formulation for dosing, the DMSO stock solution is diluted 1:10 with 20% Cremophore RH40. The final DRD formulation for dosing contains 10% DMSO, 18% Cremophore RH40, 3.6% dextrose, 68.4% water and the appropriate amount of test article.

Tumor-bearing animals are given a single intravenous (i.v.) bolus injections of either DRD vehicle or a compound of the invention formulated in DRD, both at 10 mL per kg body weight. Then, 4-24 hr after drug treatment, tumors are excised, cut in half and fixed overnight in 10% neutral-buffered formalin. Each tumor is embedded in paraffin with the cut surfaces placed downwards in the block, and rough cut until a complete section is obtained. From each tumor, 5 μM serial sections are prepared and stained with hematoxylin and eosin. Slides are evaluated manually using light microscopy with a 10×10 square gridded reticle. The percentage of necrosis in a tumor is quantified at 200× magnification by scoring the total number of grid squares containing necrosis and the total number of grid squares containing viable tumor cells.

It is expected that compounds of the invention will result in an increase in necrotic tissue in the center of EMT6 tumors relative to the baseline necrosis observed in vehicle treated tumors. As would be expected for a vascular targeting mechanism of action, rapid onset of necrosis is consistent with there being a loss of blood flow to tumors resulting in hypoxia and tumor cell death.

Example 4 Vascular Disrupting Activities in a Nude Mouse Tumor Model

The mouse mammary carcinoma cell line, EMT6 (ATCC #CRL-2755), is obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; Manassas, Va., USA). The cell line is cultured in growth media prepared from 50% Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium (high glucose), 50% RPMI Media 1640, 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 1% 100× L-glutamine, 1% 100× Penicillin-Streptomycin, 1% 100× sodium pyruvate and 1% 100× MEM non-essential amino acids. FBS is obtained from ATCC and all other reagents are obtained from Invitrogen Corp. (Carlsbad, Calif., USA). Approximately 4-5×10⁶ cells that have been cryopreserved in liquid nitrogen are rapidly thawed at 37° C. and transferred to a 175 cm² tissue culture flask containing 50 mL of growth media and then incubated at 37° C. in a 5% CO₂ incubator. The growth media is replaced every 2-3 days until the flask became 90% confluent, typically in 5-7 days. To passage and expand the cell line, a 90% confluent flask is washed with 10 mL of room temperature phosphate buffered saline (PBS) and the cells are disassociated by adding 5 mL 1× Trypsin-EDTA (Invitrogen) and incubating at 37° C. until the cells detach from the surface of the flask. To inactivate the trypsin, 5 mL of growth media is added and then the contents of the flask are centrifuged to pellet the cells. The supernatant is aspirated and the cell pellet is resuspended in 10 mL of growth media and the cell number determined using a hemocytometer. Approximately 1-3×10⁶ cells per flask are seeded into 175 cm² flasks containing 50 mL of growth media and incubated at 37° C. in a 5% CO₂ incubator. When the flasks reach 90% confluence, the above passaging process is repeated until sufficient cells have been obtained for implantation into mice.

Seven to eight week old, female Crl:CD-1-nuBR (nude) mice are obtained from Charles River Laboratories (Wilmington, Mass., USA). Animals are housed 4-5/cage in micro-isolators, with a 12 hr/12 hr light/dark cycle, acclimated for at least 1 week prior to use and fed normal laboratory chow ad libitum. Studies are conducted on animals between 8 and 10 weeks of age at implantation. To implant EMT6 tumor cells into nude mice, the cells are trypsinized as above, washed in PBS and resusupended at a concentration of 10×10⁶ cells/mL in PBS. Using a 27 gauge needle and 1 cc syringe, 0.1 mL of the cell suspension is injected subcutaneously into the flank of each nude mouse.

For the Evans Blue dye assay, tumors are permitted to develop in vivo until the majority reach 40-90 mm³ in tumor volume (to minimize the extent of tumor necrosis), which typically require 4-6 days following implantation. Animals with visibly necrotic, oblong, very small or very large tumors are discarded and only animals carrying tumors that display consistent growth rates are selected for use. Tumor volumes (V) are calculated by caliper measurement of the width (W), length (L) and thickness (T) of tumors using the following formula: V=0.5236×(L×W×T). Animals are randomized into treatment groups so that at the start of dosing each group have median tumor volumes of ˜125 mm³ or ˜55 mm³ for the Evans Blue dye assay.

To formulate compounds of the invention for dosing, the appropriate amount of compound is dissolved in 5% dextrose in water (D5W; Abbott Laboratories, North Chicago, Ill., USA). Vehicle-treated animals are dosed with D5W.

To conduct the Evans Blue dye assay, tumor-bearing animals are dosed with vehicle or test article at 0 hr, and then i.v. injected with 100 μL of a 1% (w/v) Evan's Blue dye (Sigma #E-2129; St. Louis, Mo., USA) solution in 0.9% NaCl at +1 hr. Tumors are excised at +4 hr, weighed and the tissue disassociated by incubation in 50 μL 1 N KOH at 60° C. for 16 hr. To extract the dye, 125 μL of a 0.6 N phosphoric acid and 325 μL acetone are added, and the samples vigorously vortexed and then microcentrifuged at 3000 RPM for 15 min to pellet cell debris. The optical absorbance of 200 μL of supernatant is then measured at 620 nM in a Triad spectrophotometer (Dynex Technologies, Chantilly, Va., USA). Background OD₆₂₀ values from similarly sized groups of vehicle or test article-treated animals that have not been injected with dye are subtracted as background. OD₆₂₀ values are then normalized for tumor weight and dye uptake is calculated relative to vehicle-treated tumors.

To examine the vascular disrupting activity of a compound of the invention, the Evans Blue dye assay is employed as a measurement of tumor blood volume (Graff et al., Eur J Cancer 36:1433-1440, 2000). Evans Blue dye makes a complex with serum albumin by electrostatic interaction between the sulphonic acid group of the dye and the terminal cationic nitrogens of the lysine residues in albumin. The dye leaves the circulation very slowly, principally by diffusion into extravascular tissues while still bound to albumin. Albumin-dye complex taken up by tumors is located in the extracellular space of non-necrotic tissue, and intracellular uptake and uptake in necrotic regions is negligible. The amount of dye present in a tumor is a measurement of the tumor blood volume and microvessel permeability. Compounds of the invention are expected to result in substantially decreased tumor dye uptake relative to vehicle-treated animals. Such a decrease in dye penetration into the tumor is consistent with there being a loss of blood flow to tumors due to blockage of tumor vasculature, consistent with a vascular disrupting mechanism of action.

Example 5 Inhibition of HUVEC Cell Migration

To examine if the compounds of the invention affect endothelial cell function, an in vitro human umbilical vein endothelial cell (HUVEC) migration assay is performed in the presence of a compound of the invention. HUVEC cells (passage number 4) are cultured on 12-well plates and time-lapse imaging is performed with the live cell imaging system on an inverted microscope supplied with 6-7% CO₂. The temperature is kept at 37° C. Images are taken every 30 minutes using the 2× objective for up to 106 hr or every 60 seconds using the 20× objective for 30 min. Confluent HUVEC cultures are scraped similarly to make a blank area, followed by culturing in HUVEC medium for 15 hr without treatment. The migration areas, which are imaged as time-lapse sequences for each well, are used as a basis to standardize/correct migration rates. Then, migration of cells under different treatments is imaged at the same time to generate time-lapse image sequences for each well. Time-lapse movies are further analyzed by measuring areas that are covered by migrating cells. During experiments, HUVEC cells are activated by the presence of VEGF and basic FGF. Compounds of the invention (e.g. 100 nM and 1 μM) are expected to completely block migration of HUVEC cells to the blank area, indicating that compounds of the invention possesses potent inhibitory effect on the migration of activated HUVEC cell in vitro induced by VEGF and basic FGF.

It is also possible to track HUVEC behavior during above treatments. It is expected that HUVEC cells will begin to shrink after 24 hr treatment with compounds of the invention.

Example 6 Enhanced VE-Cadherin Junctions of HUVEC Cells

An immunofluoscence study is performed by using anti-VE-cadherin antibodies to examine VE-cadherin junctions between HUVEC cells. HUVEC cells are treated with DMSO or a compound of the invention (e.g. 10, 100 and 1000 nM) for 24 hrs and fixed for immunostaining. DMSO concentration is 1:100 for all treatments. To boost the immunofluorescence signal, cells are stained with a mixture of 2 polyclonal anti-human VE-cadherin Abs followed by staining with a mixture of fluorescent secondary antibodies. It is expected that with compounds of the invention, VE-cadherin staining will be extremely strong in cell-cell junction regions, but not the non-contacted regions compared to that in DMSO treated cultures. Compounds of the invention are expected to enhance the assembly of cell-cell junctions of activated human endothelial cells, likely through induction of the accumulation of VE-cadherin molecules at the junctions. This effect could result in limited motility of the cells and reducing permeability of the endothelium, thus contributing to the cell migration inhibition and the potential anti-angiogenesis effect of compounds of the invention.

While this invention has been particularly shown and described with references to preferred embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes in form and details may be made therein without departing from the scope of the invention encompassed by the appended claims. 

What is claimed:
 1. A compound represented by the following structural formula:

or a tautomer or a pharmaceutically acceptable thereof, wherein: n is 0, 1, 2, or 3; R₆ for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂; R₂₅ is a halo, a haloalkyl, a haloalkoxy, a heteroalkyl, —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —(CH₂)_(k)OH, —(CH₂)_(k)SH, —(CH₂)_(k)NR₇H, —OCH₃, —SCH₃, —NHCH₃, —OCH₂CH₂OH, —OCH₂CH₂SH, —OCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —SCH₂CH₂OH, —SCH₂CH₂SH, —SCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇; k is 1, 2, 3 or 4; R₁ is —OH, —SH, or —NR₇H; R₃ is —OH, —SH, or —NR₇H; R₅ is an optionally substituted heteroaryl or an optionally substituted 8 to 14-membered aryl; R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; and p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or
 2. 2. The compound of claim 1, wherein R₅ is represented by the following formula:

wherein: R₉, for each occurrence, is independently a substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; or two R₉ groups taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a fused ring; and m is zero or an integer from 1 to
 7. 3. The compound of claim 1, wherein R₅ is represented by the following structural formula:

wherein: R₃₃ is —H, a halo, lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower haloalkyl, a lower haloalkoxy, and lower alkyl sulfanyl; R₃₄ is H, a lower alkyl, or a lower alkylcarbonyl; and ring B and Ring C are optionally substituted with one or more substituents.
 4. The compound of claim 1, wherein R₅ is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein: X₆, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N, N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least three X₆ groups are independently selected from CH and CR₉; X₇, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N,N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least three X₇ groups are independently selected from CH and CR₉; X₈, for each occurrence, is independently CH₂, CHR₉, CR₉R₉, O, S, S(O)_(p), NR₇, or NR₁₇; X₉, for each occurrence, is independently N or CH; X₁₀, for each occurrence, is independently CH, CR₉, N,N(O), N⁺(R₁₇), provided that at least one X₁₀ is selected from CH and CR₉; R₉, for each occurrence, is independently a substituent selected from the group consisting of an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; or two R₉ groups taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a fused ring; and R₁₇, for each occurrence, is independently —H, an alkyl, an aralkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, or —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁.
 5. The compound of claim 1, wherein R₅ is a bicyclic 9-member heteroaryl optionally substituted at any substitutable nitrogen or carbon atoms.
 6. The compound of claim 1 represented by the following structural formula:

or tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: X₁₀₁ is O, S, or NR₁₀₂; X₁₀₂ is CR₁₀₄ or N; Y, for each occurrence, is independently N or CR₁₀₃; Y₁₀₁ is N or CR₁₀₅; Y₁₀₂ is N, C or CR₁₀₆; R₁ is OH, SH, or NHR₇; R₆ is —OH, —SH, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, an alkoxy or cycloalkoxy, a haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂; R₂₆ is a lower alkyl; R₁₀₂ is —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —(CH₂)_(m)C(O)OR₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ are, independently, —H, —OH, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; R₁₀₅ is —H, —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁; R₁₀₆, for each occurrence, is independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; and m, for each occurrence, is independently 1, 2, 3, or
 4. 7. The compound of claim 6, wherein R₆ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₆ alkyl, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, C₁-C₆ cycloalkyl, and C₁-C₆ cycloalkoxy; X₁₀₁ is NR₁₀₂, and R₁₀₂ is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, —C(O)OH, —(CH₂)_(m)C(O)OH, —CH₂OCH₃, —CH₂CH₂OCH₃, and —C(O)N(CH₃)₂.
 8. The compound of claim 6, wherein R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ are, independently, selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, and cyclopropyl.
 9. The compound of claim 6, wherein X₁₀₂ is CR₁₀₄; Y is CR₁₀₃; and R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a cycloalkenyl, an aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl ring.
 10. The compound of claim 6, wherein Y₁₀₁ is CR₁₀₅; and R₁₀₅ is selected from the group consisting of —H, —OH, —SH, —NH₂, a C₁-C₆ alkoxy, a and C₁-C₆ alkyl amino.
 11. The compound of claim 6, wherein R₁ is —OH or —SH.
 12. A compound represented by the following structural formula:

or tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: X₁₀₃ is CR₁₀₄ or N; R₆ is —H, —OH, —SH, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, an alkoxy or cycloalkoxy, a haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂; R₁₀₂ is —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁; R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ are, independently, —H, —OH, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, or —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄ taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; R₁₀₅ is —H, —OH, —SH, —NR₇H, —OR₂₆, —SR₂₆, —NHR₂₆, —O(CH₂)_(m)OH, —O(CH₂)_(m)SH, —O(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —S(CH₂)_(m)OH, —S(CH₂)_(m)SH, —S(CH₂)_(m)NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁; R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; R₂₆ is a C₁-C₆ alkyl; p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 1 or 2; and m, for each occurrence, is independently, 1, 2, 3, or
 4. 13. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is represented by the following structural formula:

or a tautomer or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R₆ is an optionally substituted alkyl or cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, cyano, halo, nitro, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteroaralkyl, —OR₇, —SR₇, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇.
 14. The compound of claim 13, wherein: R₁ is —SH or —OH; R₃ and R₂₅ are —OH; and R₆ is a C₁-C₆ alkyl, a C₃-C₆ cycloalkyl, a C₁-C₆ alkoxy, a C₁-C₆ haloalkoxy, a C₁-C₆ alkyl sulfanyl, or —NR₁₀R₁₁.
 15. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is represented by a structural formula selected from the following formulas:

or a tautomer, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 16. A method of treating breast cancer or lung cancer in a mammal, comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a compound represented by the following structural formula:

or a tautomer, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof, wherein: n is 0, 1, 2, or 3; R₆, for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂; R₂₅ is a halo, a haloalkyl, a haloalkoxy, a heteroalkyl, —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —(CH₂)_(k)OH, —(CH₂)_(k)SH, —(CH₂)_(k)NR₇H, —OCH₃, —SCH₃, —NHCH₃, —OCH₂CH₂OH, —OCH₂CH₂SH, —OCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —SCH₂CH₂OH, —SCH₂CH₂SH, —SCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇; k is 1, 2, 3 or 4; R₁ is —OH, —SH, or —NR₇H; R₃ is —OH, —SH, or —NR₇H; R₅ is an optionally substituted heteroaryl or an optionally substituted 8 to 14-membered aryl; R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; and p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or
 2. 17. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and one or more compounds represented by the following structural formula:

or a tautomer, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof, wherein: n is 0, 1, 2, or 3; R₆, for each occurrence, are independently an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, an optionally substituted heteraralkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, guanadino, a haloalkyl, a heteroalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, —NR₁₀R₁₁, —OR₇, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)SR₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —OC(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(O)R₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₈C(O)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SR₇, —S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₈S(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OP(O)(OR₇)₂, or —SP(O)(OR₇)₂; R₂₅ is a halo, a haloalkyl, a haloalkoxy, a heteroalkyl, —OH, —SH, —NHR₇, —(CH₂)_(k)OH, —(CH₂)_(k)SH, —(CH₂)_(k)NR₇H, —OCH₃, —SCH₃, —NHCH₃, —OCH₂CH₂OH, —OCH₂CH₂SH, —OCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —SCH₂CH₂OH, —SCH₂CH₂SH, —SCH₂CH₂NR₇H, —OC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(O)R₇, —SC(O)R₇, —NR₇C(O)R₇, —OC(O)OR₇, —SC(O)OR₇, —NR₇C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)R₇, —SCH₂C(O)R₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)R₇, —OCH₂C(O)OR₇, —SCH₂C(O)OR₇, —NR₇CH₂C(O)OR₇, —OCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SCH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇CH₂C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)R₇, —SS(O)_(p)R₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)R₇, —OS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SS(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OS(O)_(p)OR₇, —SS(O)_(p)OR₇, —NR₇S(O)_(p)OR₇, —OC(S)R₇, —SC(S)R₇, —NR₇C(S)R₇, —OC(S)OR₇, —SC(S)OR₇, —NR₇C(S)OR₇, —OC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —OC(NR₈)R₇, —SC(NR₈)R₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)R₇, —OC(NR₈)OR₇, —SC(NR₈)OR₇, —NR₇C(NR₈)OR₇, —OC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —SC(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —NR₇C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)R₇, —C(O)OR₇, —C(O)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(O)SR₇, —C(S)R₇, —C(S)OR₇, —C(S)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(S)SR₇, —C(NR₈)OR₇, —C(NR₈)R₇, —C(NR₈)NR₁₀R₁₁, —C(NR₈)SR₇, —S(O)_(p)OR₇, —S(O)_(p)NR₁₀R₁₁, or —S(O)_(p)R₇; k is 1, 2, 3 or 4; R₁ is —OH, —SH, or —NR₇H; R₃ is —OH, —SH, or —NR₇H; R₅ is an optionally substituted heteroaryl or an optionally substituted 8 to 14-membered aryl; R₇ and R₈, for each occurrence, are, independently, —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; R₁₀ and R₁₁, for each occurrence, are independently —H, an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted alkenyl, an optionally substituted alkynyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, an optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, an optionally substituted aralkyl, or an optionally substituted heteraralkyl; or R₁₀ and R₁₁, taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl; and p, for each occurrence, is, independently, 0, 1 or
 2. 